Home

OptiScan Help - College of Optical Sciences

Contents

1. Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 131 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences There are several choices for how to specify the output Do not modify The output range is not modified If Do not scale the input is selected the output range and sampling are the same as the input range and sampling If Autoscale the input is selected the output range is increased to include the zero padding The sampling is the same as the input The Dimensions panel is used to set the output range and sampling For most calculations the output is simply interpolated onto the specify the Dimensions panel output grid after the Fourier output transform operations If the approximate point wise technique is used the output is calculated directly by using only the non zero points in the input matrix and points specified by the Dimensions panel output grid output range Regardless of the setting for the input scaling input range the output range and sampling are always the same as the input range and sampling Total distance ztotal in meters that the beam is propagated Distance m Command Line Variables ztotal Total distance propagated See Also Command Line Functions Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 132 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Chapter2 Delta Operations Delta Operations The Delta ope
2. eles p mar Lice AR LEL F 4 ae L aa i Figure No Z UP HSCAN 1 01 Tresnet_tutorial mat E3 System Build Accessories Help eee l Se e ee ee ee ee I I I I I I I l I I I I I I I I ee ee ee The SOURCE object This object is responsible for providing the optical system with a usable source of light In this experiment the SOURCE object is modified to represent a circular aperture with a radius of 1 0 mm The aperture is binary meaning that inside the aperture the optical field is 1 and everywhere else it is zero The PROPAGATE object This object is responsible for simulating propagation through free space The equations it uses are described in the Theory section The LOOK object This object is responsible for producing a plot of the output Step 1 Place and Edit a Source This section instructs the user on creating a circular aperture which is illuminated by a plane wave Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 454 10 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Select BUILD gt SOURCE from the menu at the top of the workspace RIGHT click the SOURCE object x and select EDIT Select PROPERTIES from the drop down menu under MENU ITEMS Click on GO The source size needs to be increased so change the LENGTH and WIDTH to 0 004 in the DIMENSIONS section Change the X OFFSET to 0 002 in order to center the source In th
3. 10 In this example 125 points are used These points are denoted by the green dots back See Also Tutorials Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 426 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Incoherent Lens Settings In the LENS PROPERTIES EDITOR select PROPERTIES from the drop down menu and click GO When the lens properties window comes up set the following options on the PROPAGATION tab Figure No 3 Lens Properties Editor File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help setup Propagation Aberration Illuminator Sampling About Propagation Options Input to lene 1 Propagation through lens 2 Propagation to target 3 Small meoherent source Simple pupil fo pupil mappir Focused beam C Chiet ray reference f Axis reference Electromagnetic Calculation Scalar Image 1 Bpke C Vecto Source SNA So Soe au iia f I I i I Entrance Lens Exit Fupil Pupal Help Cancel OK back See Also Tutorials Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 427 Slide l Slide2 Slide3 Slide4 Slide5 Slide6 Slide7 Slides Slide9 Slide 10 Slide 11 Slide12 Slide13 Slide1l4 Slide15 Slide16 Slide 17 Slide18 Slide19 Slide20 Slide2 1 Slide22 Slide23 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Thin Film Target Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 428 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual Universit
4. See Also Custom Pattern Panel The Add A Piece Wizard Catalog Pattern Panel Laser Diode Calculator Optical Fiber Calculator Gaussian Beam Width Calculator Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 197 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Dimensions Tab Parameters Purpose To get the x y physical dimensions of a detector source target etc Parameters Type Name Description real scalar length used to calculate xvec real scalar width used to calculate yvec real scalar xoffset the leftmost abcissa such that Sysxvec xoffset xsampling xoffset length real scalar yoffset the midpoint of the ordinates such that Sysyvec yoffset width 2 ysampling yoffset width 2 Screen Shot Figure No 1 ea ial E ie Vee Source Offsets Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 198 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences One Dimensional Grating Description Creates a one dimensional grating pattern Getting Started Choosing a Grating Getting Started Right click on the object in which a one dimensional grating is desired The object can be a target source detector or any object using the 2D viewer Click edit to bring up the properties editor Choose Replace A Piece from Menu Items and click go When the Replace A Piece wizard comes up choose One Dimensional Grating and click n
5. Figura No 2 OPTISCAN Main Programi Window Yersion 1 00 Step 1 system yu File Edi Wiere Hea Syste Built A EA E AA ee e Amange Obert im Mokelnk j Build the OPTISCAN System E Sdit Objec g Eslirk laa gtst i or the Left E Delete Object 7 E Delete link Tae a e ae System Description Aia The incident electric field is focused onto the Tain Film Pangert by a Lens The Thin Film Target is represented in Optiscan by il The resulting electric field at the last observation plane can be displayed on the screen by using a Look object Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 431 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Thin Film Target Slide 4 The Dimensions are in meters Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 432 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Thin Film Target Slide 5 a f d y re i Ca ho ie van ley ae 7 Step 3 syster Got en s property editor and select the Settings tab Setup Click the BROWSE button and select the following lens from the OPTISCAN demos folder OPTISCAN demositit SIL LENS oo ieee SIL lens has the refractive index 1 816 give the imported lens any filename The LaSFN4 is used for a SIL lens The NA in the image side is 1 3 NA sin x refractive index 1a 0 715 1 5168 i OPTISCAN is where OPTISCAN is 8 isthe marginal r
6. TILTA TILTA 1S rotation aboutthe A axis inthe Y plane k A Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 95 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Lens Tilts Slide 3 a TILTY TILT is rotation about the y axis in the AZ plane Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 96 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Lens Tilts Slide 4 Pom TILTZ TILT 4 15 rotation about the z axis inthe xy plane Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 97 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Window Dimensions Panel Description The Windows Dimensions Panel lets the user set the window for the associated object When Optiscan does its calculations it only performs then on the data within the window The rest of the data is discarded for that calculation The Windows Dimensions Panel is also used when adding pieces to a mask The piece is inserted into the mask based on the boundaries of the user specified window The Plot Window Portion x10 Magnitude Min 0 113725 Max 1 The Plot Window shows fee where the window is located with respect to the plot mask As the window s size and window s center is changed the Window will be resized and moved accordingly Window 5 x 10 Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 98 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manu
7. A Figure No 3 File Edit wiew Insert Tools Window Help Views ColorMaps Aerial lrradiance W me2 vedo Min 3 51713e 010 Max 0 00515837 Max ook Data File plot 2 5 1 1 mat Look Data Transmitted VYalue 1 638e 006 0 001504 Y 0 001963 An intensity profile of the output may be viewed by clicking on the center of the picture of the output The intensity profile of this pattern should look similar to the following picture Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 463 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences lt Figure No 4 Profile Plot Seles File Edit wiew Insert Tools Window Help Me KAAS PLEO 40 Aerial irradiance vim Profile Plot x Profile Profile T ae ih gt aTe CY 3 Mm a Ae ab LH ra i vine a of 05 Og 0 5 Position MES units Results The output of this system shows that there are 5 peaks in the cross section of the diffraction pattern produced by the circular aperture Given that the observation plane is in the Fresnel region one can use the equation N at to check the validity of this result In this case a AL 1 0 mm LAMBDA 632 8nm L 316 1 mm Plugging these numbers in one finds that N 5 just as expected Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 464 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Comparison with Experiment The
8. Cancel Ok Y STANDARD Parameters Glass File MODEL Notice that is selected This signifies that this surface is not acting as an independent element but as part of a system Click E to switch to surface 4 13 Surface 4 describes the 2 curved surface of the lens For this surface set the parameters as shown below Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 386 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Figure No 3 Lens Properties Editor File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help Lens Settings Lens Editor Parameters for Surface 4 of 5 F stanparp Parameters Radusim ooaraad Thickness m 013487 Index eC Conic foc Diameter m noe Tit radians 0 Tit radians 0 TitZ radians 0 SOSCSC S S Decenter m e Decenter r rn m re os L AG et al H hosed heed Uawsed Unused Unhred Uneeg B H I i E EB Lee Eti rer _ mi m o nia a Unused l puse iij ays WPS S J m i Unused Unused Estra Data Matrix Addi Element Add BROWSE Glass EE Dell dd Del lt lt gt Help Cancel OK Click 7 to switch to surface 5 14 Surface 5 is the observation plane in this system Set its RADUIS to Inf INDEX to 1 and all other parameters to 0 Be sure that all surfaces are set to eos Click OK 15 The following lens should now be shown in the L
9. gt COrTICAL DATA STORAGE CENTER M _ OP TIBCAN Hep Fes tr ibcobere atimagig g simulation of Scanning for Incoherent Data Project Ilumimate fluoresce nt mark and pickup the incoherent data from them Bearn focused on the center m the z axis Bearn starts to propagate at the top of data Data size 3x 3x 20 we I have one data here Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 475 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Multilayer Fluorescent Target Slide 2 a CJPTICAL DATA STORAGE CENTEH OP TISCAN Hep Fes brico ker atimagig 5 ocan Postion ofthe Target p Process SD imaging 13 accomplished in five steps Step list layer Create the hina ton beam onthe first layer Step A second layer Interact the Wharuration beam with the data layers w ith the FLOORESCEHI OBJECT Step 3 third layer Image the Bears Cren Ji amp mas bord thiores cence from each layer with the pickup ler Step 4 fourth lave ri Buld the aggregate detector field on one fee tg en Nee oo image plane step S fith layer View the rest Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 476 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Multilayer Fluorescent Target Slide 3 a CArPTICAL DATA STORAGE CENTER _ OP TISCAN Hep Fes tr ibcobere stimagig 5 Fart l 1 Source and Lens In the example a
10. 4 In the section NAME ome Reflective Target choose a title for that object Since the MIRROR is in the first arm some suggestions are Mirror from arm one Reference Mirror or simply M1 5 Continue this naming process for the objects especially the other MIRROR 6 Naming the links is just as important and while the process is similar selecting them is a little different Right click on the link connecting the SOURCE to the BEAMSPLITTER and choose EDIT A list box should show up with all of the overlapping links Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 323 10 11 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences which Link Ok Cancel These are the current names for the links Notice that right now it is confusing and they are both simply called Link The order in which they appear in this box is the order in which the were added with the latest on top This means that the one on the bottom is the first one made Select that one and click OK This action should bring up the familiar LINK PROPERTIES EDITOR window Click the ABOUT tab and name the link A suggestion here since this is the very first link is Link one or Source link for arm one After clicking OK to save the name label all the remaining links Remember to be as specific as possible to help to remember and also specify the direction like For example Splitter to Reference Mirror or
11. De pE soon ony me Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 244 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Auxillary Command Line Functions Slide 9 a rayfan Displays a plot of ray intercepts in a figure window function Es Y 2 L M N RAol rayfantkOk YOR Nra SURB way plottlag L SURM suface number of ray intersections ehh bey neues Res wey Ofor combined andy fans 1 forx fan 2 fory fan TR RA ee BOB x object height LENSUMIT S sepi esai Ui atire be YOR Y object height LEMSUNITS E OOO O O A plottiag for plot Oto supress plot a 7 fikrat Ha amp ck lose YZ intersection coordnates Lh direction cosines to next surface Rho pupil coordinate reference A plot of the fanisi in a new figure window is provided DEFAULTS SOB 0 YOR ray 40 SUR image surface falso can input SURN O fl for image surface e tte Trocetnn riled P anys there rer gat terete eee wey Hlotflag 1 Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 245 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Auxillary Command Line Functions Slide 11 a gt wavefan Displays a plot of OPD profiles in a figure window function OPO RhojaweyvefanfsOB YOR Mra way plottlag Tal way Oforcombined x and y fans 1 forx fan 2 for y fan HOB x object height LENSUNIT S YOR y abject height LENSUAITS blottlag
12. File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help Toe SG RA AY PEO y 10 Aerial Irradiance Aim Profile Plot Profile Profile T iT i fou C4 T i m ae a Ti _ Lo E T mE f 0 5 0 5 Position MES units In this case L 526 8 mm which yields three distinct peaks in the diffraction pattern profile Again one can compare this to experimental data and see how well they match up The following two figures were obtained at L 495 3 mm Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 471 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences aU au pii BU S0 40 aU ZU E EE E 100 200 a00 400 SU BUD pani References 1 Hecht Eugene Optics 3rd ed Addison Wesley Longman Inc 1998 2 Goodman Joseph Introduction to Fourier Optics 2nd ed McGraw Hill Companies Inc 1996 Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 472 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences See Also Tutorials Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 473 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Multilayer Fluorescent Target Slide l Slide2 Slide3 Slide4 Slide5 Slide6 Slide7 Slides Slide9 Slide 10 Slide 11 Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 474 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Multilayer Fluorescent Target Slide 1
13. Open New Optiscan Project Open Sample Project The Milster Research Group The Unwersity of Arzona Optical Sciences Center Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 13 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences How to Use 1 The first option to take a look at is Open New Optiscan Project This option allows you to start a project in an empty workspace but also gives the opportunity to name the project whatever you choose Below is a screenshot of how the user can name the project as well as the folder it is stored in Project Manager Look ir E prol P mg Ez ic qui tutorial B John_helphash B John readzemax i myproject jtymin_oreen m PAOJECT INFO Project Path es F oscan praj mpproject Cancel Project Folder myproject Project Hame myproject mat The user is free to name the Project Name something entirely different from the Project Folder but it is a generally good rule to have the folder the same as the Project Name This means to keep each different project in its very own folder After the names have been chosen click OK to open up a new workspace with the project names specified If a small box pops up asking if you want to Overwrite Existing Project File this means that there is already a project with that name Either click Yes to overwrite or No to rename it to something else Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 14 OptiScan 6 2 0 Us
14. Window Center Lenter Y Center Find aiin Full Wir xio Help Cancel Prey Mest gt To replace add multiply the entire pattern click on Full Win or click on Find Win and enter an X Y center along with a width and length in meters Next one is given the option of scaling the new data to a min and max Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 196 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Figure No 3 Source Properties Editor Fie Edt View Insert Toots Window Help Scaing Scale Data Main 0 Amplitude blax E C Phase Phase Option only works when multioling C Do Not e scale Data shasta Scaing umage Himaps 1 The bitmap values are hrst scaled between O black and 1 white Black through gray to white i the most stranghthonvarnd way to do the scaing However AGB values canbe used in anims sense Thal ts value sortfred 2 green 2 blue 21 2 The Ho t scaled map is then assigned values an a linear scale with U value pels assigned the value of Min and value pixels assigned the value of Has nat fies 1 The valves are scaled according to the following formua output data input datafHar Mini Min custom pattems 1 If no rescaling i desred select Do Not Re scale Helo Cancel Prey Mest gt Finally save the new source The new pattern is updated in the original edit window
15. initiate the simulation Setup Sampling Kou Lamotte NHigoNAs LP rearme Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 438 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Thin Film Target Slide 11 a Output at 2nd Observation Plane A component of component of Z component of electrical Field electrical Field electrical Field CE So te ce Final system Simulate the System and then Look af the x y and z component of electric field Each component shows the vector effects very well inside the substrate We can get better figure through the interpolation method Appendix A Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 439 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Thin Film Target Slide 12 a System Il Reflected TFT Tutorial System x Bat pupil Simulate the reflected field for A the Thin Film Target N ghe observation plane at exit pupil Dincicent The observation plane of system lis modified so that the reflected electric field can be calculated ond yer index of refrac Uon amp same as substrate The observation plane is at the exit pupil Neu pstrate Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 440 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Thin Film Target Slide 13 Configuring the TF T s Parameters Figure
16. 2um And also around line 86 in the same code gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt S gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt N_layers 10 mod ci N_layers 0 ci mod ci N_layers else ci N_layers end KIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIL SKK KK you will see this if your data layers 10 then use the N_layers 10 if you change here then change the N_layers something to fit your data layer s number Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 125 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Then click the add link to chain And click the chain this order 1t step Script object to lens 2 4 step 2 restore field to lens 3 step lens to 2 saved field object Then click the Calc then type 20 in the Chain Count Then click OK Part IV Build the aggregate detector field Main task Square of 3D saved files from step 3 and make summation After convolution calculated inside OPTISCAN we get the incoherent fields at 3 D space After simulation done Then the top menu in the window click CLEAR CHAIN In the top menu click the edit object Click the 3 restore object and type 1000 in the base index It restores files 1001 1002 1003 etc And click ok Click the 4th save fields object Then type the name that you want to have Here the name is test_accu_1 mat in the file Then click the
17. College of Optical Sciences Thin Film Target Slide 18 Figure No F Thin Film Target Properties Frditnr Ei Ers Shindo dele TFT Settings FT Layers ayer st lenera aco Fs ee eae ER Ne ya a ee se ae te Edit Incident r rs clerz 1516 substrate Change the TFT index settings Values to TET index settings vrei fre aae fra ti sirate SS M Plaersie eer Shers 2 E ees Change te TFT General zonee 0 aoe E Hp anmi j Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 446 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Thin Film Target Slide 19 Configuring the IFT s Layers Figure Ho 4 Thin Film Torget Properties Editor Cie Zd Mirdory Help IEI Sellye TFT Layers teyu dorian About click to edit Lowe asljg3 a er a5 al Ti Alip aram Bit Fery Poste oot Change the Layer Parameter Values to Sof dni 44 34 layer Neeference Z total 1 000 2 150 anena 21 m values according to 44 2 the table SHEE ia Use New Layers to add TFT layers as needed Laye wicriales C aknad amorphous Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 447 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Thin Film Target Slide 20 a Output of Phase Change Media Simulation A compo
18. OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences 4 Figure Ho 3 Source Properties Editor File Edit Tools Window Help PA Gel der C Hermite P Miedncd Match Patten Parameters MES Laser Diode Calculator Optical Fiber Calculator Gaussian Beam width Calculator Help Cancel Prey Herth gt Fig 1 How to use the Gaussian Beam Width Calculator 1 Select SuperGaus and input J in LargeNum X This means source is Gaussian 2 Click Gaussian Beam Width Calculator then the following is shown Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 259 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences SS ore Figure No 4 Jo x uw ter eat n js Pa pira Est a p ain Em T Gaussian Beam Width Calculator Rim Radius HWHH PHM Hit ie Pu Tee FW Fim Value Fig 2 3 Sigma is value of HW 1 e for Gaussian Amplitude Input proper value 4 Rim Radius is the half of source width Input proper value 5 Click Calc and repeat above procedure changing sigma until FW 1 e42 of Amplitude Squared is same as Rim diameter source width Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 260 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Beam Width Calculator Rim Padus Ampltude Ampitude Seuared 0 004718 0 0029435 0 00176
19. Seidel sanere Seidel Coef ate LARG INW O check IMD 20 S F 4722220002 gt WO40 43402780003 SA 8 505173e 002 SI 0 O00000e 000 W131 0 000000e 000 TE O 0 000000e 000 SIII 0 000000e 000 W222 0 000000e 000 SiV 0 D00000 e 000 Wie 0p 0 00000 UeHIU0 ov O UOU0U0e 000 311 OQUU000e 4000 CL O_UU00U00e HI00 WWO20C OD OOD000e 000 CT U 0U0000e 000 111 O O00000e J00 Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 252 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Auxillary Command Line Functions Slide 10 rayfan notes NOTES The simplist way to use this function isto open an optics object for editing and type rayfani If numerical output is desired Hut in leading brackets eg Tas Tae an mL mM my myRiho raytan If specific object heights number of rays etc are desired putin the argument of the function e g rayfant0 10y for a y direction object height of 10 lens units The lens units are usually millimeters The outputs of way 0 the combined fans are colurnn vectors in WICH first half is they fan and the second half is the x fan type helo rayfan for online help in the MATLAB command window Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 253 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Auxillary Command Line Functions Slide 12 a wavefan notes MA
20. Specifying The Pieces Size Step 2 Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 177 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences The Piece Size window is where the size and location of the input mask is specified The input mask will be re interpolated based on the sampling of the mask it is being placed into If the Full Window Button is clicked then the input mask will replace the old mask entirely x10 Magnitude Min 0 Max 0 WARIO Size width O66e005 Length f 0 25e 005 Window Center Ceritler 05e 005 Y Cenber Find win Full Wir Scaling The Mask Step 3 The Bitmap Scaling scaling parameters specify the dynamic range of the mask Bitmap Scaling Bitmap Min Bitmap biag One purpose of Bitmap Scaling is the addition of a phase factor to the input mask Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 178 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Saving The Updated Mask Step 4 The Bitmap Scaling scaling parameters specify the dynamic range of the mask The target file for example contains two masks tar_br Bulk Reflection tar_yy Kerr Component If the Add Piece Wizard was used to modify the Bulk Reflection component and then this modified mask is saved to a new file then the Add Piece Wizard will copy the the missing mask tar_yy into the new file Most mask files however ju
21. br suyslrale 1816 i TFT indexsettings Edit TFT Gerare Jetra nincident 1 8 1 6 Cn substrate 1 816 a o Result Field me iic 7 gt CLICK TSP for information 3 Image about 20 zinc zoffset interface jolis T Nplanes and Result field etc inte are A Hr amet J Help Cancel Ok Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 436 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Thin Film Target Slide 9 Configuring the IFT s Layers Figure Mo 3 Thin Film Target Properties Editor Fil ce ardue Help THT Settings TFT Layers LeyeristFilename About click to edit layer 12 Change the Layer Parameter Values to Layer Por mates 4 Asterance 1 Liner aly i Tetal Hiem Change these values of layer H1 i If you have more than two layers than you need to Cut some layers If you have less than two layers than you need some New Layers IShphoord CLICK Help for information on how to do this if you need to Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 437 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Thin Film Target Slide 10 a A Ha Ca Ged binin l ri Sindee rai 1 Arrange lha C E EET Ta 1 Click the Button to start the simulation 2 Set NHIghNA to the value Sampling NHighNA Bia 3 Click on the a Button to
22. cos linspace 0 2 p1 100 end After the custom user data is initialized and or updated it can be stored by using simdata userdata userdata Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 314 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences The following is a list of other simdata properties that may be useful number of samples to use for High Numerical Aperature optics simdata NHighNA i calculations Snor Nees _ number of samples to use for Low Numerical Aperature optics calculations simdata LAMBDA the current value for LAMBDA simdata SourceType 1 for coherent 2 for incoherent simdata SourceTypePoints number of source points for an incoherent source simdata PointCount current source point number for an incoherent source simdata VisitCount number of times that the current object has been calculated The project directory may be determined using project_path fullfile mop lt project gt Example this simple MOP function calculates the Total Aerial Irradiance of the input fields and stores it in Ext function mop curlink simdata errmsg mymop action mop curlink simdata errmsg retreive the desired electric fields if istransmitted curlink ex Simdata Ext ey simdata Eyt ez simdata Ezt elseif istransmitted curlink ex simdata Exr ey simdata Eyr ez simdata Ezr else errmsg Need an Input Link retur
23. piece Scaling useage Bitmaps 1 The bitmap values are first scaled between 0 black and 1 white Black through gray to white is the most straightforward way to do the scaling However AGE values can be used in an rme sense That is map value sorted 2 green blue 2 The G to 1 scaled map is then assigned values on a linear scale with U value pisels assigned the value of Min and 1 value pels assigned the value of Maz nat files 1 The values are scaled according to the following formula output data input data Mas Min Mir custom patterns 1 lf no rescaling is desired select Do Not Re scale Help Cancel Prey Hest 6 The final step is to save this change It 1s often wise to rename the file to make it unique To do this click BROWSE and then type in the file name you wish to use like M1_reflect or reference_miurror Editing the Mirror Depth l The mirror depth is what controls the orientation of the mirror to the whole setup In this set up there needs to be small amount of tilt in the reference mirror to create straight line interference fringes Select DEPTH from the TARGET MASK menu and then use the REPLACE A PIECE option This should open the ADD A PIECE wizard again but this time select LINEAR RAMP from the options or pattern input We want the mirror the mirror to have a slight tilt upwards so it first needs to be rotated This first section al
24. 1 for plot 0 to supress plot utput OPD in wavelengths of the lens see lens editor panel OFDD is relative to the chief ray in the exit pupil Rho pupil coordinates A plot of the fanisi in anew figure window is provided DEFAULTS foe O QE i ray 40 11 way 0 a plottlag 1 eee er Paes sar wawo rerea Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 246 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Auxillary Command Line Functions Slide 13 spot diagram Displays a spot diagram of the ray intercepts in a figure window function R 2 L M M Tag spot diagrami 0B YOR Mray SURN way plotted E as SURN surface number of ray intersections eae te Ee way Ofor all trays way 1 for rays passing stop were pa AOB x object height LEM SUIT S YOR Y object height LENMSUNITS Hlottlag 1 for plot Oto supress plot tt l at Intersection coordinates LMM direction cosines to newt surface Tilace ray transmission through stop surface A plot of the fanisi in anew figure window is provided DEF AULT S sgo 0 TOB Nray 20 SURN image suface also can input SURE 0 for image suface wey blotlag 1 eq day cares Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 247 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Auxillary Command Line Functions Slide 4 a pupil First order pupil info
25. 2 The propagation window has direct curved r i E ee nen for the source located at the entrance pupil of the as optical system ABCD direct for propagation of sont ogee light from the entrance pupil to the exit pupil and tis High NA dir cos for propagation from the exit pupil down to the disk 3 The sampling window has 35 sampled points across the pupil 4 The numerical aperture of the High NA conjugate of the focusing optics is 0 5 For more discussion on sampling in OPTISCAN refer to the a pendix Milster Research Group Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 367 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Scanning Spot Tutorial Slide 6 a Ideal Collection Optics Collection High NA on ie nee Ob s hie t en Fees a side of o P The user will notice 1 High NA to low NA collection optics 2 Click SPERRE ties Go to look at the lens System exit pupil p ropertie 5 of he colle ction optics The user will notice 2 The propagation window has High NA dir cos for the propagation of light from the disk to the entrance pupil ABCD direct for propagation of light from the entrance pupil to the exit pupil and None Curved Exp for propagation to the exit pupil down 3 The sampling window has 35 sampled points across the pupil Milster Research Group Copyright 2005 Un
26. Build Help OPTISCAN creates a new source and places it in the Sonik upper righthand corner of the project workspace Target ENA Wek ES Detectors Source oe n 7 Add link to chain i Propagate ee ERS ae Beam Splitter Clear chain 7 Tools Accessories Menu The various items that can be created are described in the Optiscan Cheatsheet Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 18 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Optical Fiber Calculator Gaussian Beam Width Calculator Laser Diode Beam Calculator Help Optical Fiber Calculator Gaussian Beam Width Calculator Laser Diode Beam Calculator Thin Film Calculator Thin Film Calculator RCWT Calculator ROWT Calculator Glass Dispersion Calculator help page coming Glass Dispersion Calculator soon Object Controls When Arrange Object is actived clicked on then objects may be relocated in the project workspace by dragging them around with the mouse When Edit Object is actived clicked on the objects in the project workspace may be editted by clicking on them When Delete Object is activated clicked on the objects in the project workspace may be deleted by clicking on them amp Arrange Object Edit Object Delete Object It may be more convienient to right click an object in the project workspace and then choose the desired action from the menu which is displaye
27. Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 443 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Thin Film Target Slide 16 a Output of reflected field at the Optical Disk A compon ent of 7 component of electrical Field electrical Fleld bp Il system Il Eai Final ty ear es Simulate the system and then Look at the x y and z compoenent of the reflected electric field at the image Note that the difference from the system due to the vector diffraction The x component gives more elongated in x direction The 2 component gets more side lobes than the system I Also we can get the phase information of each component Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 444 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Thin Film Target Slide 17 a system Ill Phase Change TFI Tutorial System imulate Phase Change Media by introducing a recording layer in between two dialetric layers p Te e 7 etka Interface Mod el Descri pt ion j incident oP Interface Il Refract ve ra ri ay Thickness Al gap My 1 616 1st i i 2 150 g0 nm Recording ayer hn Dielectric The observation R di and dhctic yer znd Reflective layer Dielectric 2 150 Reflective i 1245 5 pasion Layer 124881 eee Amorphous Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 445 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona
28. Lagrange invariant a SI SV Seidel coefficients a V s wavefront aberration coefficients s CL amp CT longitudinal and transverse color NOTE all distances are in lens units usually millimeters Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 378 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Tutorial Creating a Thick Lens Description The purpose of this tutorial is to instruct the user on how to use the LENS EDITOR to create a thick lens Theory Creating a Thick Lens See Also Theory From a geometrical optics perspective a thick lens can be thought of as two refracting surfaces separated from each other by some distance t The space between the two lenses is filled with an index of refraction n The following is a diagram of a thick lens Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 379 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences e Surtace 1 Surtace 2 Ry Ry The following equations describe the power of the thick lens as well as the positions of the principal planes P and P n R 1 represents the power of surface 1 l T R 2 represents the power of surface 2 P of 8 4b 3 represents the total system power 4 represents the distance from the 1 vertex that P shifts FI T g Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 380 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual Universit
29. Layer Specific Panel Delta Variable Calculation Options Getting Started Start by building a Gooey Delta Object and linking it to the target you want to modify link to chain Optics Targets i ulate chain Detectors O EEE i r chain Source Propagate Polarization Element Beam splitter 300 BY Delta Script Delta save fields Restore fields Mathematical operation Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 160 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences system Build Accessones Help Amrange Object Make link i Add link to chain i Edit Object i Edit link i Clear chain Delete Object i Delete link i ee e Ce pe e a a e Gooey Delta objects are used by clicking Edit Object and then clicking on the Gooey Delta If the Gooey Delta is associated with more than one object such as the configuration below Ok i Lancel will be displayed after the Gooey Delta is clicked on choose the desired object from the selection list then click OK to display the Gooey Delta Panel shown below Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 161 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Figure Ho 3 Delta Properties Editor File Edit Tools Window Help Variable Tool About Delta Parameters Click Add To Add Variables Remove Add Help Cancel OE Next click add and the dialog box below
30. Layers may be added to a detector to simulate a detector with multiple outputs For instance the schematic for the multiple detector example can be simplified using a single detector icon that has 4 layers one for each quadrant To add layers to a detector open the Detector Properties Editor by right clicking the detector icon and selecting Edit Select New Layer from the Menu Items drop down menu Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 50 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Menu ltems Properties Properties Replace 4 Piece Multiply Piece Add Plece nave Laver Os New Laver Choose the appropriate options to edit the responsivity of the layer Each layer should be saved under a different file name so that Optiscan can differentiate between the layers when writing the data output file Unlike the multiple detector example the output data for all 4 layers 1s written to a single file instead of 4 separate files The format of the data file is tab delimited and looks similar to the following table when imported into a spreadsheet 0 00E 00 0 00E 00 0 00E 00 0 00E 00 0 00E 00 5 60E 01 0 00E 00 0 00E 00 5 60E 01 0 00E 00 0 00E 00 5 60E 01 0 00E 00 0 00E 00 0 00E 00 0 00E 00 0 00E 00 2 49E 01 0 00E 00 0 00E 00 2 49E 01 0 00E 00 0 00E 00 2 49E 01 0 00E 00 0 00E 00 0 00E 00 0
31. OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences default filename is flds mat N_src_points The number of source points to be used for an incoherent source points src_type_flag Selects the source type that the restore fields object simulates A value of 1 instructs the restore fields to act like a coherent source and a value of 0 instructs the fields to act like an incoherent source res_baseindex A number used in order to catalog the files generated by many sequential simulations For example if the filename flds yv dat is used with a res_baseindex 1000 then the Ist simulation will have a filename flds1001 dat associated with it the 2nd simulation will have a filename flds1002 dat associated with it etc incoherent_baseindex A number used to catalog the fields produced by each source point when an incoherent source point is used For example if the filename src v dat is used with a res_baseindex 1000 then the Ist source point will have a filename src1001 dat associated with it the 2nd source point will have a filename src1002 dat associated with it etc Save Fields O O O ext_flag Selects whether or not to save the x polarized transmitted fields If the value is 1 the field is saved if the value is 0 the field is not saved eyt_flag Selects whether or not to save the y polarized transmitted fields f the value is 1 the field is saved if the value i
32. The result of adding the delta target link to the chain The label 1 indicates that this is the first step of the simulation Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 358 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Step 4 Add the Target Look link to the chain Simulating the Model This should be the final result after all the links are added to the chain The meaning of this is that the Delta Target calculation is performed next the Source Target calculation is performed and finally the Target Look calculation is performed In English the Delta object positions the target s window light is shined onto the target and finally the look object produces an output plot The next section Simulating The Model sets the simulation parameter Chain Count to 5 This means that the model s calculations are repeated 5 times The difference of each chain calculation is the position of the window Step 1 Click the Calculate Chain button to start the calculation Add link to chain O Calculate chain b Clear chain Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 359 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Step 2 Set the Chain Count to 4 This will generate four calculations of the reflection of the source off the target hd odel Parameters Phan Count LAMBDA opie Userdata Folder userdata Click the OK button to beg
33. lt userdata Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 340 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences 3 It s often better to work with straight variables than object data so input this line into the code Ext Slimdata Ext 4 Also enter code to give a value for the error message At this time you could probably leave it empty Note that there are no spaces between the symbols errmsg 5 Since there will be two passes to the MOP there needs to be an if statement to deal with each case Simple code like that below should work The keyboard statement is used to debug the program if necessary if slmdata VisitCount Mlfield Ext Sindata Ext Mlfield cdi dirname save tenp Mlfield else cdi dirname load temp mat skeyboard Eautl Ext tHltield sindata Ext Foutl end 6 Save the m file and remember to have it have the same name as that in the firs line of the function file In this case the file name would be MOP test The file should be saved to the scripts folder inside your project folder 7 To load this file into the MOP object in the workspace right click on the MOP icon cr and select EDIT Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 341 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences A Figure No 4 Field Operation Properties Editor File Edit wiew Insert Tools Window Help Script Tool About Script Se
34. multiple links between the same two objects the links are a special color as shown in the picture below Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 91 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences When you edit a link that is one of several links between two objects a window will pop up asking you which link you want to edit The links are identified by the names that you gave them using the about panel This window will also pop up when you click on a multiple link set to add one of the links to the calculation chain See picture below for an example Which Link Link to beam splitter Link to target Ok Cancel See Also Project Workspace Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 92 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Lens Tilts Slide l Slide2 Slide3 Slide4 Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 93 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Lens Tilts Slide 1 gt vertex of lens TK y s Fach lens vertex has an x and z axis e he zaxis is usually the propagation direction he order of rotation is important OPTISCAN uses first ILT then TILT then TILT m Units of TILTA TILTY and TILT4 are degrees Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 94 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Lens Tilts Slide 2 a
35. resim_2 m resim_3 m resim_4 m would be generated If Base Value is 1000 then the series resim_1001 m resim_1002 m resim_1003 m Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 158 resim_1004 m would be generated OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences STRING TABLE A String Table specifies the exact values of a string variable by using a text file Each line specifies a single value for the string variable If the line starts with a then the line is considered to be a comment String Options Hase SumeSting BASE ae Sting Table Modula Count hearr eee ee Je ae er a VSR Wibe tS Hace ening i Step Type myvalues tt Int Eat Browse If the file myvalues txt contained MLL conservative input files resim_1001 m resim_2001 m resim_3001 m resim_4001 m Then the string variable would get these values simulation step 1 resim_1001 m simulation step 2 resim_2001 m simulation step 3 resim_3001 m simulation step 4 resim_4001 m Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 159 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Layer Specific Gooey Delta Panel Description Gooey Delta Variables that modify specific layers of the TFT and MO targets Layer Specific Gooey Delta variables work just like regular Gooey Delta variables with an additional input panel described here Getting Started
36. splitter to M1 reflected are good choices When labeling the link from the splitter to the reference mirror remember to make sure that the link is in the REFLECTED mode When labeling the links from the BEAMSPLITTER to the OP remember to have one link in TRANSMITTED MODE and the other in REFLECTED MODE and to label accordingly Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 324 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Step 4 Edit the Source This section instructs the user on creating a basic Gaussian source Setting the Dimensions 1 Right click the SOURCE object x and select EDIT 2 Below is the default for a source 4 Figure No 4 Source Properties Editor Sel File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help Views ColorMaps Magnitude Min 0 113725 Max 1 Max Source File sre smat Source Mask Ix Source Menu ltems Properties Value O31b2 X F235e 007 Y 2 97Se 006 Help Close 3 The first step is to set the size of the source Go into the source PROPERTIES from the MENU ITEMS box and select the DIMENSIONS tab Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 325 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Figure No 4 Source Properties Editor Sel File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help Dimensions Source Type About Dimensions width Length Offset Offset Aa ampling 7 81 25e 005 Y samplin
37. zvec 4 1 0 1 P sin 4 x Tilt in X direction direction Astigmatism with axis at 45 degrees Monomial representation Meaning Astigmatism with axis at O or 90 degrees Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 88 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Third order 2y 3xy 3x coma along x axis Third order 2y 3y 3x7y coma along y axis y 3x y 4y x Ax3y 6xy 8y x 8x y Third order 1 6y 6x 6y 12x y 6x4 spherical aberration By Hox ay agx 4 y 6x7y x Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 89 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Links Description Links are used to specify how electric fields propagate through an OPTISCAN model Specifying the Link s Type Using Multiple Links See Also Specifying the Link s Type Link Type TPR CROP UCET TR Ce TCR C OOOO Tiel Teeter itr C Peftlected Fields C Object Field Operation Transmitted The object at the tail of the link often uses the transmitted fields attribute of the link to determine how it should do its calculations For example the reflective target performs its calculations on the transmitted fields Ext Eyt Ezt 1f the link type is Transmitted Fields Reflected The object at the tail of the link often uses the transmitted fields attribute
38. 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences The most important thing to configure is the variable s name This variable will be accessed using delta_variables width more in the custom MOP function Step 4 click the oea button Configuring MOP Variables scaler string choice Custom Scaler Configuration Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 142 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Type 1s the variable real or complex variables Min the minimum value for the variable Max the maximum value for the variable Custom String Configuration a 7 rate Ay BP tee Aad Oh eS Se ie i s 7 La LER et ok faena oa ga fal pa Erea pefe biah Be atl fe Ad EEE AIEA Custom Chioce Configuration Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 143 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences 3 Bo eee a nah poe L a User Variable Parameters a ea ee TFN rat ah ee ee ae a a a rh a ia Tie pete Fe Pie ai ee et i a af cll J B e 4 DAN ag nia LE mi eee Hre Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 144 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Delta Function M files Introduction Delta files are used to modify the parameters of the models objects during a simulation Functional Interface The following
39. 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences z107 Magnitude Min D Max 1 250 200 This is the mark 150 inserted into the target s Bulk Reflection mask 100 50 Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 187 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Catalog Pattern Panel Description The catalog pattern panel enables you to choose from several pre made patterns instead of importing bmp or mat files Getting Started Choosing a pattern and angle Patterns Getting Started Right click on the object in which a catalog pattern is desired The object can be a target source detector or any object using the 2D viewer Click edit to bring up the properties editor Choose Replace A Piece from Menu Items and click go When the Replace A Piece wizard comes up choose Choose from Catalog Patterns and click next You will then see the catalog pattern panel Choosing a pattern and angle Simply click the pattern you want and enter an angle of rotation in the Angle edit box Patterns Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 188 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Uniform Data mark bh A Circle HF data pattern e eoo LF data pattern pe d hz lz ISI data pattern K S SE EENE E Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 189 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual Universi
40. 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences The Piece Size window is where the size and location of the input mask is specified The input mask will be re interpolated based on the sampling of the mask it is being placed into If the Full Window Button is clicked then the input mask will replace the old mask entirely ay in Magnitude Min E Wax Awinden Size width 0662 005 length 0 25e 005 Window Center Meente 0 5e 005 y Center Find Win Full win Scaling The Mask Step 3 The Bitmap Scaling scaling parameters specify the dynamic range of the mask Bitmap Scaling Bitmap Min Bitmap biag One purpose of Bitmap Scaling is the addition of a phase factor to the input mask Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 185 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Saving The Updated Mask Step 4 The Bitmap Scaling scaling parameters specify the dynamic range of the mask The target file for example contains two masks tar_br Bulk Reflection tar_yy Kerr Component If the Add Piece Wizard was used to modify the Bulk Reflection component and then this modified mask is saved to a new file then the Add Piece Wizard will copy the the missing mask tar_yy into the new file Most mask files however just contain one mask Sample Output Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 186 OptiScan 6
41. Along with it are Replace a Piece and Multiply a Piece All of these options use the same format to modify the object The Add A Piece Wizard Input From File Panel Catalog Pattern Panel Custom Pattern Generator Custom Pattern Example Dimensions Tab Parameters One Dimensional Grating One Dimensional Grating Rectangular One Dimensional Grating Fourier Series Catalog One Dimensional Grating Fourier Series Direct Input One Dimensional Grating Fourier Series Trapezoid Bitmap Scaling Panel Dimensions Panel Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 175 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Input From a File Description Allows you to import your own bmp or mat files Specifying a Mask Specifying The Pieces Size Scaling The Mask Saving The Updated Mask Sample Output Specifying a Mask Step 1 Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 176 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences The Add A Piece wizard supports the importation of 256 color BITMAP s and Matlab MAT files BITMAPS can be created by a BITMAP drawing program such as Paint Brush Note 24 bit BTIMAP s do NOT work MAT files can be generated in MATLAB using the save command Figure B shows a sample input mask that is stored in a BITMAP file lt A B If a matrix is choosen the Add A Piece Wizard will ask which matrix it should use
42. Also set the RADIUS to Inf Click EA to switch to surface 2 11 Surface 2 is designated as the stop surface of this system This means that the diameter of surface 2 needs to match up with the stop diameter Set the DIAMETER of this surface to 50 8e 3 Also this surface should have a thickness of 0 a RADIUS of Inf and an INDEX of 1 Click gt to switch to surface 3 12 Surface 3 describes the thin lens for the system Set the parameters for this system as shown in the figure below Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 404 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Figure Mo 6 Lens Properties Editor File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help Lens Settings Lens Editor Parameters for Surface 3 of 5 7 Y PARASIAL Parameters Radius m in Focal Length m 01 Thickness m ma Index ye Unused Uused Conic cr Unused Laced Diameter m 508e3 MENTS Tit radians 0 Tit radians 0 Titz radian p Decenter gt m je Decenter r m nn Glass File MODEL Extra Data Matrix BROWSE lt f gt Element H pol Ra Y PAR ASIGL Parameters Notice that is selected For paraxial surfaces an INDEX of 1 must be used or the system will not function properly Click Ea to switch to surface 4 13 Surface 4 determines the plane of observation for this system For this surface change the surface type to a standard surface by using the pull down menu to s
43. Bitmap Scaling is the addition of a phase factor to the grating Saving The Updated Mask Click browse to change directories See also One Dimensional Grating Rectangular Grating Fourier Series Grating Catalog Fourier Series Grating Trapezoid Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 211 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences One Dimensional Grating Fourier Series Trapezoid Description Creates a one dimensional trapezoidal grating pattern using a Fourier transform Getting Started Base Period Angle Number of Coefficients Finishing the Wizard See Also Getting Started Right click on the object in which a one dimensional grating is desired The object can be a target source detector or any object using the 2D viewer Click edit to bring up the properties editor Choose Replace A Piece from Menu Items and click go When the Replace A Piece wizard comes up choose One Dimensional Grating and click next When the next panel comes up choose Fourier Series Trapezoid and click next You will then see the following panel 1 Dimensional Grating trapezoid base Pernod Angle Humber of Coetficients Base Length in meters of the base of the trapezoid Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 212 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Period Period of the grating in meters Important Note I
44. College of Optical Sciences Command Line Variables Z0 The amount of defocus in the z axis zoffset The amount of offset from the interface in the z axis Exy Off diagonal element of permittivity n_incident Index of refraction of incidnet medium n_substrate Index of refraction of the substrate interface The top position of each layer in the z axis mo_fname The name of the file containing the MO layer information The default is basemo mat See Also ink Parameters Panel Command Line Functions Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 117 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences MO Layer Manager Panel Description Allows the user to add delete and configure MO layers Layer List Paste Last MO Layer E Layer Parameters Copies the current MO layer s Layer List Parameters to the clipboard Removes the current MO layer and places it on the clipboard Inserts a new MO layer before the current layer Inserts a new MO layer after the current layer The listbox to the left shows the layer list The current layer is the layer which is selected Laver Parameters ass er Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 118 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences N Reference 1 The index of refraction for the layer Total Te DU The thickness for the layer MO layer _ Check
45. Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 43 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Transmission Target create and manage transmission targets a transmission target is built using 256 color bitmap masks see Transmission Target Optiscan Viewer Window Panel Magneto Optical Target create magneto optical targets see MO Layer Manager Panel MO Settings Multilayer Fluorescent Target create multilayer fluorescent targets see Multilayer Fluorescent Target MLF Demo Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 44 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Simple Responsivity Detector Description The detector object allows the user to simulate an integrating detector in an optical system That is the detector integrates the optical irradiance over the exposed surface of the detector and saves the integrated result as a single value in units of Amps Getting Started Editing the Detector Using the Detector Multiple Detector Example Adding Layers to a Detector Command Line Variables Notes See Also Getting Started Click Build gt Detectors gt Simple Responsivity in the main model panel Click on Arrange Object and drag the detector icon e to the desired position Editing the Detector The default detector in Optiscan is square shaped with dimensions of 1mm x 1mm and a sampled array size of 500x500 This detector has a re
46. Delta Variable list looks like this Variable Tool About Delta Parameters num samples output filenane show plot i These Gooey Delta Variables are accessed in a custom MOP function using Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 140 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences function mop curlink simdata errmsg custommop action mop curlink simdata currently there is no detected error so there is no error message errmsg retrieve the delta variable structure with our variables delta_variables get_deltavariables mop Younmarshall the arguments with the eval statement the second argument to eval is returned if the first Yargument does not exist i e not set with the delta object width eval delta_variables width 10e 6 length eval delta_variables length 10e 6 output_filename eval delta_variables output_filename result mat 1 show plot 2 dont show plot delta_variables show_plot 1 pertorm the calculations Adding a MOP Variable Step 1 click the Add patie on the Variable Tool Step 2 click the MOP Custom Variable variable from the variable pick list a Add Which Variable Mo P C u sto m Y aria ble Cancel Step 3 choose the type of the custom variable and then configure more it as desired Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 141 OptiScan 6
47. Figure Ho 4 File Edit Tools window Help Laser Diode Calculator Laser Diodes LTO30MD MF Ral New Laser Save Laser Delete Laser LTOS0MD ME Wavelength 7 5e 007 Astigmatism o s PavHM Far Field EE Gaussian x Pw ite 2FarField Fame a Spot FAHM 37973 0068 lt Spot PW Te 45612006 Mame direction is parallel to junction Gaussian FHM Far Field Bs CLorerntzian YPwie 2FarField passa O f direction is perpendicular to Tipa PHM j 34364 007 Esponential junction Y Spot Pw 1 e 2 3954007 There is already a list of catalog numbers for laser diode in this menu For a new laser you can click New Laser and build your own data base For a commercial laser X FWHM unit degree and Y FWHM unit degree in far field are provided Hence X spot FWHM and Y spot FWHM are calculated For detailed information see Laser Diode Calculator Type the calculation results of X spot FWHM and Y spot FWHM in Source Property Editor and then click next 6 click next into the next step Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 270 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Figure No 3 Source Properties Editor lolx File Edit Tools window Help Window Size width Ee 00E 7 Length 6e 008 j Window Center Lenker Y Lenter Find iin Full satin Help Cancel g Prey Next 7 click next into the next step Copyright 20
48. Ho 3 Thin Film Target Properties Editor File Edi wedos Help TFT Settings TFT Layers Layedist Filename AOU TFT irie Salling TFT index settings ninckcetit E neuoeirale Set the TET Genera Parameters to fl 0 ae 0 me m i Papi zne JO zoffset 0 o interface Result field Pupil _ Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 441 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Thin Film Target Slide 14 Configuring the IFT s Layers Fiunn Mno 3 Thin Film Target Propertios Friar Eil Zd idu Hilp Click and edit layers one and two Change the Layer Parameter TFT Sent age TFT Layers Leyetic Fitenane Ate 2 values to Layer a amele s Str mnn Tolb Tr Slipara layer n reference z total 2 Teco 2e 7 Change these values of layer 2 In purba aby layer 2 2 EEE W akuar Waw ayer Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 442 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Thin Film Target Slide 15 a Output of reflected field at the Exit Pupil component of component of electrical Field electrical Field A component of electrical Field 202 6 mm 6 simulate the system and then Look at the x y and zcompoenent of the reflected electric field Note that this is the electric field at the exit pupil
49. I I I I J I I I I I I I 1 I I I I I I x I I I I I I I I I I I I Jd I I I I I I I fen A EN L E ay em ny ey ay T ee aca Baw Se A ASE ey E O raa mages ry ee pte mL gm rey atom Ty ages tg ata a a typ Magne tony oem Beat E S daea a S Blorss E aaie my th mer ET Slogan gy Window Hel Tools Insert see eee be ee ee ed ee ee ee asm wg A a EA nye le iti Ct iti ei en a ve 30 quaja aea JO SHUN UL dG File Edit lt A Figure No 4 Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 392 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences lt A Figure No 45 File Edit Help Tools Deng RAAL PEs WEY window Hel Insert lt 10 i e a o a e o aa a I I I I I l I I I I I I J I I I I I I I x I I I I I I x I I I I I I I I I I I I Jd I I I I I I I ee ee ee be ee ede ee ee EE pt ay te ee ty ty ot id on is ote pe ey ke Sa jes mg ely oe ty ir ty os eee eee pe ee 41 a ety Sata pers ty oT pee ety Se pee te pe ey te LU JuaWasedsig Soe ee ee ee et ee a meals erin A aa ata ce a mtr ry aaa latte ames et a re ena aan et at eaten aaa ea scaly acai my Soe E DSc Sree oe Relative pupil coordinate Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 393 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Figure No 6 E le File Edit View Insert Too
50. If specific object heights number of rays etc are desired put in the argument of the function e g rayfan O 10 for a y direction object height of 10 lens units The lens units are usually millimeters The outputs of way 0 the combined fans are column vectors in which the first half is the y fan and the second half is the x fan Command X Y Z L M N Rho rayfan XOB YOB Nray SURN way plottflag Arguments O Input SURN Surface number of ray intersections The default is 0 way Q for combined x and y fans 1 for x fan 2 for y fan The default is 0 XOB X object height LENSUNITS The default is 0 YOB Y object height LENSUNITS The default is 0 plotflag for plot O to suppress plot The default is 1 O Output X Y Z Intersection coordinates L M N Direction cosines to next surface Rho Pupil coordinate reference pupil Displays first order pupil information Also returns LENSstruct which contains all of the information about the lens The simplest way to use this function is to type pupil This will display the pupil information only Leaving the semi colon off the end of the command will cause Optiscan to display all of the information in LENSstruct as well Command pupil Arguments O Input none O Output none optfir Displays first order lens information The simplest way to use this function is to type optfir Command optfir printId Arguments O Input print
51. Index Game u following the surface Diameter lo Conic _ The conic constant for the surfacee Diameter The diameter of the surface Use the Add and Del buttons to add or delete layers Use Add Del x gt gt the left and right arrows to navigate through the lens s surface parameters Yy STANDARD Parameters Prge 1 inuzed Upnsed rused rysedd Unused Unused This is a list of all the customizable Hissa oo parameters depending onwhat surface eae sities type The type can be changed by pressing Unused Unused the upside down triangle to open the menu Wawa enact In wo the options these parameters are not used Unused Untied Unused Unused Unused United Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 70 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences The menu of types of surfaces The standard surface type Panpili Standard Includes pl h ASPHERIC andar ncludes planes spheres BINARY OPTIC 2 and conics Thin lens surface has ideal Paraxial behavior Asphene i Standard surface plus polynomial ashpere terms Ok Cancel dial vol Binary Optic 2 _ Uses radial polynomial to Y BINARY OPTIC 2 Parameters Diffraction Order T ASPCOEF2 ASPCDEFA ASPCOEFE ASPCOEFS AoPLOEFIO ASPLCOEFT2 ASPCOEFI4 ASPCOEFTE HITT Extra Data Matrix gt Element 1 T Add pg Dell define phase This is a
52. Intersection coordinates L M N Direction cosines to next surface Tflag Ray transmission through stop surface waveftan Plots a wavefan for a lens The simplest way to use this function is to type wavetan If numerical output is desired put in leading brackets e g myOPD myRho wavefan If specific object heights number of rays etc are desired put in the argument of the function e g wavefan 0 10 for a y direction object height of 10 lens units The lens units are usually millimeters The outputs of way 0 the combined fans are column vectors in which the first half is the y fan and the second half is the x fan Command OPD Rho wavefan X OB YOB Nray way plottlag SURN Arguments O Input way Q for combined x and y fans 1 for x fan 2 for y fan XOB X object height LENSUNITS YOB Y object height LENSUNITS plotflag 1 for plot O to suppress plot SURN Ending surface for calculation O Output OPD OPD in wavelengths of the lens see lens editor panel OPD is relative to the chief ray in the exit pupil Rho Pupil coordinates rayfan Plots a rayfan for a lens The simplest way to use this function is to type rayfan If numerical output is desired put in leading brackets e g myX myY myZ myL myM Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 236 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences myN myRho rayfan
53. No 4 File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help Views ColorMaps Aerial lrradiance Wim2 edo Min 3 9996e 016 Max 0 000952924 Max Look Data File plot 4 8 1 2 mat w Look Data Transmitted Value Q0005S0S A 1 767 An irradiance profile of the output may be viewed by clicking on the center of the picture of the output The irradiance profile of this pattern should look similar to the following picture Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 411 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Figure No 5 Profile Plot File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help D a kAAY APS Aerial Irradiance temz Profile Plot Profile Y Profile ah 5 E oe saa cr a aw an T OG m Le oh Lo D sE A d Position MKS units Results Using Incoherent Light A 2 D view of the system output should be seen similar to that shown below Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 412 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences J Figure Mo 5 File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help Views ColorMaps Magnitude 40 Min 4 64489e 021 Max 00608499 Max Look Data File plot 3 5 1 25 m t z Look Data A T ransmitted Al amj hd y 10 Value 00004069 A 4435e U05 W 33032 006 Help Close DI i do The irradiance plot looks like the following Copy
54. Polarization The output data file for the detector can be changed by selecting the PROPERTIES menu item and clicking on GO When the new window appears click on the RESULTS FILE tab in the upper section of the window Note if more than one fiber detector is used in a project each output file must be named differently This is done in the last step of editing the fiber detector propagating mode pattern The user must uniquely specify the filename that the propagating mode pattern is saved under Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 58 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences J3 Figure No 5 Detector Properties Editor Seles File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help Specify Output File Directory D oscan proy detector demno detectors Save As new detector mat New Name Help Cancel Prey Finish Using the Fiber Detector Once the desired detector pattern is generated the user links the detector into the project workspace Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 59 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences a it TIL FE Phr ma i re a a n a J l Heure Mo 4 OP SCAN 1 01 0Der detector _2 mat La Help System Build Accessories TIEA ae ar ae ae ae ee eS ee ee ee ee ee ee eee Se el Be oe ee Sel Phe Roce Pee Ps Pees Po Pe eee Ree Pen Pee eee Pe Penne Pac Pon Ss Peer P
55. Rectangular and click next You will then see the following panel 1 Dimensional Grating rectangular Sit Width j 1006 Penod 6 H Center Shift 1006 Angle T Help Cancel lt Prey Ment gt Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 200 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Slit Width Width in meters of one slit of the grating Period Width in meters of one period must be at least equal to slit width plus center shift Important Note If the chosen period is too close to the sampling of the object results may be unpredictable If you experience problems with this increase your sampling by decreasing the distance between the samples X Sampling and Y Sampling in the properties of the object However decreasing these values too much can cause your computer to slow down considerably and even freeze when you try to add multiply or replace a piece Center Shift Distance in meters that the center of the slit should be shifted relative to the period must be smaller than the period minus the slit width Angle Angle of rotation in degrees of the entire grating Choosing zero degrees results in a vertical grating Finishing the Wizard Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 201 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences The Piece Size window is where the size and location of the grating 1s specified The grating
56. The result is shown on the right The result of adding the donut piece to the target Th he left is called th Ss wi 7 e green box on the left is called the target s window o Gc ee ee The target s window specifies the active portion of the target l M By moving the target s window to the right during the simulation disk motion can be simulated Use the target s Properties menu item to modify both the target s dimensions and the target s offsets to match the sources Dimensions Window Dimensions About Dimensions width Bek Lerath Bek sas a i 1 2 it he ots eit EREE EEEE EE EEN AEREE EEREN R SEE AEA Waste EE E a IEEE ie Hie EHE x elise Pes Y Oifset Sampling Sampling Berni YSampling ESR Be b 1 00 The result of changing the dimensions and window dimensions Set the Target s window to the following dimensions qo Magnitude Min 0 Max 1 see Window Dimensions 4 Window Size ___ Width Length window Center Center MEAT Click on OK to close the Target Properties 3 Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 357 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Building the Chain Step 1 Click on Add link to chain Step 2 Click on the Delta Target link Step 3 Add the Source Target link to the chain Add link to chain Calculate chain Clear chain
57. User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences gt Figure No 1 _ 0 x File Edit Yiew Insert Tools Window Help TFT Layers Layerlist Filename About Laver List 1 0 Laver Parameters N Reference 1 To Clipboard Z Total 12 006 Paste Last Ed Tools Import List Clipboard New Laver Help Cancel OF Fig 10 then when try to plot you will receive an error message fig 10 No layers entered switch to default Ok Cancel Fig 11 Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 301 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences By clicking OK you are agreeing to use the Index of Substrate value in the main parameters window and agreeing to a Z Total value of 1E 7 Clicking Cancel will cause nothing to happen To see the actual numbers used to plot the graphs just click the check box marked Save Plot Values and you will see a box to choose the directory Fig 12 and then it will continue to make the plots Save Plot Values As Fe 2 x Save it E oscan den c Ej _JWORKFUNC Save as type MAT files mat Cancel Fig 12 Click here to go back to the Thin Film Calculator main pa Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 302 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Chapter 8 File Operations File Operations Many of the attribut
58. View Insert Tools Window Help D a KAA S PED Aerial lrradiance vim Profile Plot X Profile Profile ak 2 ak DEN AT CY i L TF ga eS m L Le E of mi f O65 O 0 5 Position MES units To produce this pattern the TOTAL PROPAGATION DISTANCE is 0 1975 Using the same equation as before to determine the number of peaks in the diffraction pattern one finds that N 8 for L 197 5 mm which is indeed what the program yields The experimental data for this diffraction pattern taken at L 203 2 mm can be seen in the following figures Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 468 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences ao ih Iza 120 100 oL BU Aq 20 0 0 S0 100 150 200 250 From the next example one can see that increasing L will reduce the number of peaks Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 469 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences A Figure Mo 3 Seles File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help Views ColorMaps Aerial lrradiance Wimd2 p40 Min 3 14521e2 010 Max 0 00503313 Max ook Data File plot 3 5 1 4 mat Look Data Transmitted VYalue 1 8re 005 A 0001658 Y 0 001056 Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 470 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Figure Ho 5 Profile Plot paa
59. a m m m a l al I I l l l l I I I I I I I I I I Step 3 Labeling the Icons and Links It is very important to label all the objects in the workspace It is especially important in a system like this where there is more than one mirror and links overlap each other 1 To label an object right click on the icon and choose EDIT Start with the MIRROR on the top 2 The familiar target edit screen should appear Choose PROPERTIES from MENU ITEMS and click GO The following screen should appear Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 321 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences A Figure No 4 reference mirror for arm one M1 Properties Editor Seles File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help Dimensions Window Dimensions About Dimensions Lfiset Offset Aoampling 7 81 252 005 Y Sampling 752505 0 3 Click on the ABOUT tap at the top and then the following screen should appear Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 322 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences A Figure No 1 Reflective Target Properties Editor File Edit wiew Insert Tools Window Help Dimensions Window Dimensions About About Mame Reflective Target Desc none Calculate Every Chain Calcuation C First Chain Calculation Based On Flag Vector Last Chain Calcuation Based On taput Link
60. a homogeneously layered object I Magneto Optical Target same as thin film target with the addition of one magneto optic layer Special Simulation Tools Delta Object allows the user to modify the parameters of other components during simulation Look Object allows the user to look at results graphically during a simulation run Mathematical Operation perform custom calculations on the system s electric Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 30 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences fields Input as a Matlab m file Angular Spectrum propagation aih Save Fields save electric fields to disk Restore Fields restore electric fields from a disk Detail of Optics Module Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 31 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Figure Mo 4 Lens Properties Editor File Edit Toole Window Help View ACEP aa a i kienu bem Properties bal The Optics Module uses direction cosine propagation It offers direct conversion of Zemax files It has a flexible aberration calculation the user can choose from Ray based Zernike or User input The calculation has the ability to do tilts decenters and aspheres The diffraction code includes Huygens high numerical aperture and out of focus plane calculations There are Critical and K hler illumination o
61. aj y i complex bulk depth matrices Kerr rotation reflection matrices relative to A m arr matrices r tar_br d tar_dp Fy tar yy r tar_br d tar_dp Fy tar yy r tar br d tar_dp Getting Started Click on the Build menu in the main model panel point to Targets and click on Reflective Target Click on Arrange Object and drag the target to the desired position The two dimensional distribution of the matrix elements can be edited with the 2d viewer The default parameters are all zero except for tar_br Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 106 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Command Line Variables width_x The width of the reflective target The default 1s 20e 6 length_y The length of the reflective target The default is 20e 6 offx The offset of the reflective target from the optical axis in the x direction offy The offset of the reflective target from the optical axis in the y direction offz The offset of the reflective target from the optical axis in the z direction xsample The sample spacing in the x direction ysample The sample spacing in the y direction window_width_x The width of the window that scans over the refelctive target window_length_y The length of the window that scans over the refelctive target window_xcenter The x coordinate of the scan window s center window_ycenter The y coordinate of the scan window s center ta
62. be described by object 1 The laser source emits a light beam that interacts with object 2 a lens system The lens system directs the laser energy onto a target plane The energy in the target plane can be saved to a file with object 3 which is a utility object that doesn t affect the optical field distribution In general the interaction with each object can be pictured as shown in the figure below ubowut Field lmuout Field Optiscan 7 i Crbjpect o Matrices oordinatt Ext Exr System pa tanssia Meld Eyt Eyi SYSxvec r reflection field Ezt Ez Sys ye The working matrices of the calculations are Ext Eyt Ezt Exr Eyr and Ezr These six two dimensional matrices describe the polarized electric field complex amplitude of a transmitted field and a reflected field The coordinate system for all matrices is described by the sysxvec and sysyvec vectors which define the spatial positions of the columns and rows respectively of the field matrices The OptiScan object can modify any of the field matrices depending on its function For example a transmission target will affect the transmitted fields and a reflective target will affect the reflected fields In each case the corresponding coordinate system vectors are appropriately modified An optics object transforms the field distribution in the object plane with object plane Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 8 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of A
63. calculated the simple series of commands MyExt4 abs MyExt 4 Simdata Ext MyExt4 assigns the fourth order field distribution to the Ext working matrix Other field matrices and system information can be accessed through the simdata structure A large amount of effort went into making sure that during setup of the objects in your project and during the calculation the loading of variables in the Matlab command line interface window is minimized That is OptiScan is virtually transparent to the command line The user is free to use any of the powerful Matlab functions in the workspace without interfering with OptiScan An exception occurs with plotting If the user wants to plot data using any of the Matlab plotting routines from the command line a new figure window should be opened first If not some of the graphical user interface objects in the OptiScan project window may be overwritten For example if the user wants to graph yvec versus xvec the command line should take the following form figure plot xvec yvec One common problem with users is that they loose track of how much data they are generating The save fields object is very useful but in multiple calculations with large Chain Count the amount of data can easily be in the GB range or more A little forethought housekeeping and planning go a long way For example if only a scalar calculation is required Ext is the only field matrix that requires a non ze
64. choose Save Project As from the file menu Save Project As Save ini E proj E gui tutorial B John_helphash ID John_readzemax B myproject tymin green 4 history mat i Save as type MAT files mat Cancel It will prompt to name the file and in which folder The browser window should open to the default proj folder which is where the saved project will remain What this will do is create a new folder with the project name and the project stored inside Both the folder and the mat file will have the same name keeping things very convenient Another way to save the project is to just choose Save Project from the file menu This will just save the current project under the same name effectively replacing it with a new copy If a name was never specified then it 1s just saving the current project as myproject mat Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 16 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Project Workspace Description The Project Workspace is the main window of Optiscan Important Demo Main Project Workspace System Menu Build Menu Accessories Menu Object Controls Links Help Button Calc Button See Also Important Demo To learn about the workspace it is recommended that new users have fun with the Simple Disk Tutorial This tutorial uses the concepts which are discussed below Main Project Wo
65. created on surface 4 the dummy surface just before the focus plane An offset Se 6 m is chosen to start the calculation and an increment 0 1e 6 m is set to add to the offset for each successive cycle A more difficult way to change the lens focus is with the script delta object In this case the script file change_focus in the project directory is used to control the thickness of surface 4 on each cycle Note that the initial value of the thickness must be set in the lens editor before the chain is activated for calculation However this example is useful because it illustrates the use of the script delta object which can be more powerful than the gooey delta object How to use 1 Use the following configuration for the gooey delta object ait wie Pe ed Sp ert Pear Sos e 4 j eure No 2 UP SCAN 1 01 focus slice mat x ees ee ee ee A gi i I I i I i I 4 i i I i I I i 1 I i I I i I Since the focus changes by 0 1 um after each cycle starting at S5um and ending at Sum requires 101 cycles Set Chain Count to 101 in the Setup panel after selecting the Calc button in the main window Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 489 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences 2 Use the following configuration for the script delta object J Figure Mo 2 OPTISAN T 017 focus slice mat system Buld Accessones Hep Arrange Diei E laksmi Add fink
66. is the function interface for delta functions function del curlink simdata errmsg delfunc action del curlink simdata Delta Function Parameters del the del variable is the instance of the Delta object that is invoking the delta function currently no uses for this object within the handler are employed Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 145 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences curlink the curlink variable is the instance of the link that points to the object The link labeled T 1 is the curlink for the reflected target The link labeled R 2 is the next link for the reflected target The next object after the target object is the look object The Delta object has no current link since no link points to it The link labeled O 3 is the next link for the the Delta The next object after the delta object is the target object The curlink can be used to test what kind of link it 1s more istransmitted curlink input are transmitted fields isreflected curlink input are reflected fields isoperational curlink input is an operational link this link was generated by the issimulated curlink simulator simdata simdata is a MATLAB structure and it contains a lot of useful information Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 146 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Current value for Transmitted Fiel
67. miscellaneous notes for users Detector help page Help documentation is now available for the detector object The fir first order optics command line program in OPTISCAN now is activated by typing optfir Please see the help pages for more detailed instruction on using command line inputs in OPTISCAN Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 25 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Publications A user friendly diffraction modeling program in Conference Digest of Optical Data Storage Topical Meeting p 60 IEEE New York 1997 An Optical System Simulation Model in MATLAB Rose Early Tom D Milster Oral presentation SW04 415 at Opto Southwest 2001 Physical Optics Simulation in Matlab for High Performance Systems Tom D Miulster OPTICAL REVIEW Vol 10 No 4 2003 246 250 Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 26 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences An Optical System Simulation Model in MATLAB Rose Early Tom D Milster Optical Sciences Ctr University of Arizona Tucson AZ 85721 Motivation The motivation for developing the OPTISCAN program came from a need for a flexible physical optics simulator that could deal with specialized problems including scanning for optical data storage laser to fiber coupling lithography and near field microscopy The program also needed to have the ability to perform specialized
68. numerical aperture of the high NA focusing optics Refer to the appendix for discussion on building a target Milster Research Group Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 370 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Scanning Spot Tutorial Slide 9 ym AD The soey delta is ess ntial in op cal scanning pplica ie at allows tre ROSTON S 0 f the focuse ds Spot on the of ptical disk o be changed The incremental step sizeis s user defir ad 2 Right mouse click on i the object The user will see 1 The properties window with the X window center that p i is to be incremented 2 The incremental amount 3 Remove and Add buttons to add or remove system parameters to be incremented In this application only the X window center and the Y window center can be incremented by the gooey delta 4 The incremental step size is set to be 1 20 of the target bit period Numerically this is 0 07um In scanning applications the number of steps also the number of scan locations is set inthe calc wizard as the number in the chain count Milster Research Group Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 371 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Command Window Functions for the LENS Editor Slide l Slide2 Slide3 Slide4 Slide5 Slide6 Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 372 OptiScan 6
69. of the link in its calculations For example the reflective target performs its calculations on the reflective fields Exr Eyr and Ezr if the link type is Reflective Fields Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 90 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Object Field Operation The Optiscan Simulation Engine will skip calling the calculation procedure for the object at the end of this type of link For example in the following model the Delta purple triangle objects are used to update the reflective target s window and the name of the output data file The link labeled 1 uses transmitted fields the link labeled 2 uses reflective fields and links labeled 3 and 4 use object field operations The calculation for this model goes as follows Load source Ext Eyt Ezt and sysxvec sysyvec Calculate reflection off target Save reflected fields to disk Modify the name of the output file Modify the target s window AR WN By setting links 3 and 4 to object field operations the data was not saved to disk again and the reflection off the target was not recalculated Using Multiple Links It is possible to have more than one link between the same two objects The first thing you need to do when using multiple links is to name each link right after you create it You can name a link by using the About Panel See the About Panel page for more information When there are
70. of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Definitions of parameters FWHM Full Wave Half Maximum Radius radius of the pattern LargeNum coefficient in supergauss Hermite X x direction Hermite mode number Hermite Y y direction Hermite mode number Angle angle of rotation Example Click here to see an example of how to use the custom pattern generator See Also Example The Add A Piece Wizard Catalog Pattern Panel Laser Diode Calculator Optical Fiber Calculator Gaussian Beam Width Calculator Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 191 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Custom Pattern Generator Example Getting Started SuperGaus Hermite Mix And Match Finishing See Also Getting Started The following outlines how to use the Custom Pattern Generator to make a user defined source configuration I Zz 3 Create a source in the main project window Right click on the source and choose Edit Once in the edit screen you will see the current default gaussian source shape and controls to the right To change the source shape click on the Menu Items drop down and choose Replace a piece Note that the following steps will now replace the source shape but are also the same if Multiply Piece or Add Piece were chosen Click go then choose Create custom pattern On the top left are the three choices for patterns SuperGaussian Hermit
71. offlr Offset in the x direction LARGENUM Power to which the exponent is raised example yy exp q 2 LARGENUM where q is defined by x y andr O Output yy 2 D matrix containing the Supergaussian information Lens Functions These functions may only be used when the lens editor is open Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 235 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences spot_diagram Plots a spot diagram for a lens The simplest way to use this function is to open an optics object for editing and type spot_diagram If numerical output is desired put in leading brackets e g myX myY myZ myL myM myN myTflag spot_diagram If specific object heights number of rays etc are desired put in the argument of the function e g spot_diagram 0 10 for a y direction object height of 10 lens units The lens units are usually millimeters Command X Y Z L M N Tflag spot_diagram XOB YOB Nray SURN way plotflag Arguments O Input SURN Surface number of ray intersections One can input SURN 0 for the image surface way 0 for all rays way 1 for rays passing stop The default is 1 XOB X object height LENSUNITS The default is 0 YOB Y object height LENSUNITS The default is 0 plotflag 1 for plot O to suppress plot The default is 1 Nray The number of rays traced through the lens The default is 20 O Output X Y Z
72. operations including vector high NA focusing and import export for XFDTD and Zemax files The other main motivation was an interest in efficient use of student time Over the last ten years our research group has developed many very powerful simulation codes for various applications like optical data storage and laser scanning Each time a new student joined our group it took a significant amount of time to learn the codes An average learning curve was about six months We wanted to design a program that would connect the different codes in order to shorten the learning curve Although it took over a year to get OPTISCAN to a useable state the results are worth it In one case a student started with no knowledge of the program and was producing results in less than one hour Now new students can use the results of previous students efforts to provide consistent scientific output Design Philosophy Optiscan was designed as a research tool Its a Non commercial program but is available through the University of Arizona OPTISCAN is flexible so that custom Matlab program modules for specific applications can be easily incorporated into calculations It was designed to have an easy to use Graphical user interface Optiscan came directly from our research efforts nothing was canned Optiscan was written in Matlab because Matlab already has many useful commands that can be used in Optiscan for optical calculations and is set up for general mathematic
73. parameters specify the dynamic range of the grating Bitmap Scaling Bitmap Min Bitmap biag One purpose of Bitmap Scaling is the addition of a phase factor to the grating Saving The Updated Mask Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 215 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Click browse to change directories See also One Dimensional Grating Rectangular Grating Fourier Series Grating Direct Input Fourier Series Grating Catalog Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 216 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Bitmap Scaling Purpose When a BMP file is read in the RGB values of the bitmap are scaled appropriately Examples For a reflective target the BMP color black OxOxQ can be scaled to the index O and the color white 255x255x255 can be scaled to the value 1 If the user desires to add phase to an object the MULTIPLY A PIECE option must be used Select the PHASE radio button and enter the maximum and minimum values for the phase in radians Parameters Type Name Description complex scalar Bitmap Min minimum value of bitmap set to this complex scalar Bitmap Max maximum value of bitmap set to this Screen Shot Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 217 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Figure Mo 3 Source Properties E
74. set up simply run a simulation with the chain count equal to twice the total number of variables Output After the simulation is finished a file will open that contains the values of the variables during the simulation and the number of the chain count where the value was at a minimum and the number of the chain count where the value was at a maximum If you run another simulation that involves the same variable and uses RSS analysis the new values will be written to the same file The time of the simulation is also written to the file so you can tell which set of values is which If you want to start over with a clean file simply delete or move the existing file The file is saved in the current project s userdata directory with the name of the variable as the filename Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 173 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Notes Please contact optiscan optics arizona edu for more information regarding RSS See Also Gooey Delta Panel Scalar Delta Variables Monte Carlo Analysis Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 174 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Chapter 3 Modifying Objects Modifying Objects Any time an object within Optiscan has a shape or mask associated with it it is viewed with the 2 D viewer To change the mask or to add to it the option Add a Piece is in the drop down menu
75. the M button located beneath the drop down menu 015 01 005 Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 389 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences x p bd The following window will appear Esti Choose oom Option Ok Cancel Select ZOOM ON and click OK 20 Now that the zoom has been activated click on the rear focal point of the lens about 3 or 4 times to get a detailed view of the spot Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 390 2l OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Figure No 3 Lens Properties Editor File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help View Axis Menu tens Viewer Settings T axis mi 0185 0149 0195 02 0205 O21 axis im gt N From the picture shown above it is clear that this lens has spherical aberration To get a more quantitative analysis of the aberrations present wavefan rayfan and spot diagrams may be plotted To do this go to the Matlab command window and type wavefan rayfan spot_diagram Be sure to leave the LENS PROPERTIES EDITOR open when using these functions Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 391 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Bistrot r il r Polen p r hte fre hotest ar hat Ere r ar rad brat hot oe Deir at iid P DES kA APT relative pupil coordinate I I I I I l I I
76. this box if the current layer is the Magneto Optical layer Tools Fe Tools ene ane ae Seen Import List Imports a previously created MO layer list New Layer Inserts a new MO layer before the current MO layer See Also MO Settings Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 119 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Multilayer Fluorescent Object r f Fi S a iai a Main Help Desk Table of Contents Starting point Open MATLAB start OPTISCAN Then click next then browse and click ok If there is file named f1 mat in the project history list then click ok You will see figurel the project wizard Then click finish Then Optiscan opens the project that you want to do Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 120 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences TISCAN 1 00 fi mat ioj LDLT WLA par Please click HELP at every step for detail especially part I and II Part I 1 source Click edit object in the top menu bar Then click the source object Go to PROPERTIES in MENU ITEMS And click GO Then you will see DIMENSIONS where we can choose the source size and offset Etc The next button to DIMENSIONS you may see SOURCE TYPE such as COHERENT or INCOHERENT Choose the COHERENT because you use the coherent source as an illuminating one And you may choose the SOURCE S LAMBDA
77. to each other similar to the following picture Step 3 Observing the System Output 1 Place a LOOK object by selecting BUILD gt TOOLS gt LOOK 2 Move the LOOK so that it is close to the OPTICS icon similar to the following Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 407 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Step 4 Linking the Elements 1 Select MAKE LINK from the workspace menu 2 Click on the x icon and then click on the 0 icon This will make a yellow arrow with the letter T in the center of it signifying that the light will travel from the source icon to the propagation icon 3 Click on the 0 icon and then click on the icon Another yellow arrow with a T in the middle of it will appear This tells the program to observe the light coming through the Step 5 Creating a Chain 1 Select ADD LINK TO CHAIN from the workspace menu 2 Click on the arrow between the x and n icons Now click on the arrow between the Si n and icons The schematic will now look similar to the following z _e mee e m mmem FL ee eee 3 Select SYSTEM gt SAVE to save the project Step 6 Running a Simulation and Viewing the Results 1 Click on the CALC button to simulate the setup 2 Set CHAIN COUNT to 1 LAMBDA to 6 328e 007 and USERDATA FOLDER to userdata 3 Click OK Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 408 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manu
78. to pay attention to which links are being selected This shows the importance of labeling them The workspace should look something like that below ok A Heure Mo A OP HSCAN 1 01 twymin_test mal x System Build Accessories Help te ee aaa a a o aa o Be eee l j ll M l m a a m M ee M XXXL d TESPIS Der SUTE ae Poer ST TES PT Poe SA TEI m ee oE POr Poeg Sa TES mor Perna ee e a ae POT Sa TES POT PERI a ee PUS Paer E ES m Poer Sa TES PT ey Mn PUS Per Sa TE Pr Pae ee ES Poer A E ale Per Se TES POT Pae Sa TES PoS Poer ee NG Per Sa TES POT PIS a ele Oe 4 Itis a good time to save the project Select SYSTEM gt SAVE AS to save the project and Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 343 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences give it a name like Twyman Green or if it already has a name just select SYSTEM gt SAVE Step 10 Running a Simulation and Viewing the Results 1 Click on the CALC button located at the bottom right corner of the workspace to simulate the setup 2 You can change the wavelength to whatever value you desire or keep it at its default but keep the chain count at 1 3 Click OK 4 After a little time the following screen should show lt Figure No 3 E File Edit wiew Insert Tools Window Help Views ColorMaps Magnitude Min 1 34169e 016 Max 0 999979 E ook Data File i plot 6 15 1 5 mat a Look Data Tra
79. will appear x Sd Which Yarable H Substrate z0 z offset Layer Specific Variable Uk Cancel Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 162 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Click Layer Specific Variable then click OK to display the Layer Specific Gooey Delta Panel Layer Specific Gooey Delta Panel Figure Ho 4 E o a oj x Layer Parameters Layer List C Aeference if 2 Total Help Cancel Create Click on the layer number you want to modify and then click the name of the variable Click create and you will be brought back to the regular Gooey Delta Variable panel Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 163 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Figure No 3 Delta Properties Editor 2 ioj x File Edit Tools Window Help Variable Tool About Delts Parameters Laver 1 n reference Scaler Description l Help Scaler Uptions Initial Value Step Yale 0 oer EE 3 Value zj Modulo Count Inf Sutace Number Remove Add Calculation Options Debug Parameter Flag vector i Even Help Cancel OF So far all Layer Specific Gooey Delta variables are scalar so you can look at the Scalar Delta Variable page for more information on how to set them up Delta Variable Calculation Options The value of a Delta Parameter does not need to be updated d
80. 000 x 1000 The shape of the detector can be reconfigured by changing the detector responsivity Editing the shape of the detector responsivity is identical to editing the shape of a SOURCE object or the shape of a TARGET object The user simply selects one of the editing options replace a piece multiply a piece or add a piece in the menu selection and follows the instructions to build the desired detector pattern Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 46 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Menu lems Properties Properties Replace 4 Place Multiply Piece Add Piece Save Layer As New Laver Because Optiscan uses the same subroutine for editing the DETECTOR responsivity pattern as it uses for editing the SOURCE pattern and the TARGET patterns the user needs to be aware that some of the selections might have different physical meanings or might not be very useful For example adding a phase to the detector is equivalent to simulating a detector built on a surface that is not flat Also while Optiscan gives the option of choosing a data mark as one of it s catalog patterns it is highly unlikely that that pattern will be used for a detector responsivity pattern The output data file for the detector can be changed by selecting the PROPERTIES menu item and clicking on GO When the new window appears click on the RESULTS FILE tab in the upper section of the window Note if mor
81. 00E 00 0 00E 00 5 60E 01 0 00E 00 0 00E 00 5 60E 01 0 00E 00 0 00E 00 5 60E 01 The difference between this data file and that of the single detector is that an additional column is added to represent the layer number of each row This 1s the fifth column seen in the table above Command Line Variables width_x The x dimension of the detector in meters length_y The y dimension of the detector in meters offx The offset from the optical axis in the x direction in meters offy The offset from the optical axis in the y direction in meters xsample The sample spacing in the x direction ysample The sample spacing in the y direction Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 51 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences fnamel The name of the Ist detector layer mat file det_result_folder The location of the output data folder for detector The default is the userdata folder of the current project det _result_file The name of the 1st data file The default is d1dat dat Notes There is a slight bug that occurs when changing the responsivity pattern of the detector The Y axis is reversed in the viewer that is used to select the window size and position for the new pattern element This will cause an element positioned in the upper half of the screen in the edit window to actually appear in the lower half of the screen when the
82. 05 University of Arizona 271 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Figure Ho 3 Source Properties Editor File Edt Tools Window Help Scalirig i Scale Data Min o i i Amplitude Han E i Phase Phaze Option only Works when multiple C DoHotRe scale Data 4 piece Scaling useage Bitmaps 1 The bitmap values are first sealed between 0 black and t pahite Black through grav to white 1 the most straightforward way todo the scaling However ALB values can be used in arms sense That is map value sqt red green 2 blue 21 2 The O to 1 caled map is then assigned values on a linear scale with U value piel assigned the value of Min and 1 value pels _ assigned the value of Max mat files 7 The values are scaled according to the following formula output data input data Masx Min Mir custom patterns 1 Pro rescaling i desired select Do Not Ae scale Help Cancel Prey 8 click Finish into the next step Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 272 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Figure Ho 3 Source Properties Editor Specii Output Fle Directoy d oscan profimyproject sources ave As src a mat You can click Browse and save this source as a matrix using the name you want 9 A custom pattern of laser diode is generated Cop
83. 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Command Window Functions for the LENS Editor Slide 1 gt Command Window Functions for the LENS Editor When you edit an OPTICS object the LENS Properties Editor left will re be displayed Immediately after this window is displayed several functions can be entered in the Ed ___ pumi MATLAB Command Window in B ana S order to query the properties of the displayed lens f changes are made to the lens in a oa the LENS Editor the new lens can be querried if the user returns to the view window as shown on the left LENS functions The following pages pupil field describe each function in a Seidel More detail The user can also type help function Sur name in the command window fir Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 373 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Command Window Functions for the LENS Editor Slide 2 a This function displays first order pupil information STON stop number a ENP THI ENP distance STOD stop diameter from first element ENPD entrance pupil diameter EXP THI EAP distance from last element EXPD exit pupil diameter i NOTE all distances are in ENPZ ENP distance from object lens units usually a EXPZ EXP distance from image millimeters Copyright 2005 Universi
84. 6 Li OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences A Figure No 5 Source Properties Editor File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help Views ColorMlaps Magnitude hin U Wax Wax Source File sro2x mat Source Mask FE Source Menu ken Properties Yalue A 0000033 Y a8e 005 On the SOURCE PROPERTIES EDITOR window select ADD PIECE under the MENU ITEMS drop down menu Click GO Select INPUT FROM FILE and click NEXT The bitmap used in this example can be found at oscan html tutorials point_imaging points bmp Locate the file that you wish to use by clicking the BROWSE button Click NEXT Select 1 10 of the entire window by entering 2 5e 5 for both the WIDTH and LENGTH Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 398 18 19 20 21 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Figure No 3 Source Properties Editor File Edit wiew Insert Tools Window Help 0 i 4 x 10 Help Cancel Window Size Width oog Length o o00025 Window Center Y Center Find Wir Full Win Center ln g Prev Mext gt Click NEXT SCALE DATA AND AMPLITUDE should be selected the MAX should be 1 and the MIN should be 0 Click NEXT Save the file as src2x mat and click FINISH The SOURCE PROPERTIES EDITOR now looks similar to the following picture Copyright 2005 U
85. 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Figure Mo 3 M Test Mirror Properties Editor File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help Views ColorMaps Magnitude Min 0 Max 9 97019e 008 Max Target Files JE a M2 test mat Target Mask Depth Menu lbems Replace 4 Piece Value OU A 0 000611 Y 0 003707 Step 8 Creating the Mathematical Operation A Twyman Green interferometer works based on the superposition of two waves one from the reference mirror and one from the test mirror The superposition is basically the addition of the two waves coming from the two arms To simulate this effect a Mathematical Operation must be performed saving one result as it passes from one arm and then adding it to the other as it comes through 1 First create an m file in your project folder It must be a function file and the first line should read something like function mop curlink simdata errmsg MUP testlaction mop curlink simdatal There are four variables that must be passed out mop from the operation curlink for the current link simdata is all of the data and errmsg in the case there might be an error 2 Unfortunately persistent global variables do not work for a MOP see User Notes The values must actually be saved The correct directory must be used To find and use the correct directory enter this into the code dirname Cfullfile mop lt project
86. 78 ane a55 one Flim Value pi Soe a ee Fig 3 6 Put this FWHM value for Amplitude into FWHM X in Fig 1 The Meaning of Each Width Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 261 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Amplitude exp sigma 2 Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 262 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Amplitude 2 exp 20 sigma 2 See Also Custom Pattern Panel Laser Diode Calculator Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 263 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Laser Diode Calculator Description Contains specifications of several commercial lasers and allows the user to calculate far field divergence angles and near field spot size values for typical laser diodes One of the main uses of this calculator is to lookup or calculate values to use in the custom pattern generator since most laser diode specifications list far field divergence in degrees while Optiscan works with the spot size in meters The custom pattern generator can then be used to generate a realistic laser diode source Getting Started Notes Buttons Parameters Example See Also Getting Started The Laser Diode Calculator can be accessed through the Accessories menu or from the Custom Pattern Panel Notes when you change the wavelength all va
87. A Choosing the Source Type The Choose Source Type portion of the Source Type Panel allows the user to specify the desired type of source 7 Choose Source T pie f Coherent i Incoherent eh mEn tenie panee ters STEAME EOREETI f aaue Coherent The field shown in the source viewer is a coherent field Incoherent The field shown in the source viewer is an incoherent field That is the brightness as shown in the viewer is a collection of independent source points that are treated as individual emitters in the propagation calculations The brightness of each point as shown in the viewer describes the relative brightness of each point in relation to the other source points To calculate the light pattern resulting from an incoherent source OPTISCAN calculates the operation of objects in the chain on the field from each source point The number of source points used is selectable in the edit box as described below The position of the source points is randomly chosen from the nonzero distribution shown in the viewer When you select Incoherent you are allowed to enter the number of source points and the base index Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 63 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences i Incoherent S N Source Points 50 Eee Toon The Sampling Style determines how Incoherent Source points are generated sn o If the sampling style is random the
88. Arizona 495 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Simulate Scanning a Laser Beam Over a Target Source Object Startup Wizard Panel String Delta Variables Surface Specific Gooey Delta Variables Target Window Using Tilts O TILTX O TILTY O TILTZ Thin Film Calculator O Thin Film Calculator Example TFT Layer Manager Panel TFT Settings Panel TFT Tutorial Transmission Target Troubleshooting and FAQs User Notes The Zoom Control Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 496
89. Building Thin Film Tagets View the reflected fields Scanning Spot System Querying Lens Parameters Auxilary Command Line Functions Lens Tilts Multilayer Fluorescent Target Covers Delta Object Source Object Look Object Reflective Target Object Source Object Optics Object Thin Film Target Look Object Source Object Gooey Delta Object Detector Save Fields Optics Optics Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 347 The Tutorial You can Open the system with Optiscan in this directory OPTISCAN demos simpledisk OPTISCAN demos tft OPTISCAN demos scanning OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Tutorial Simulating A Rotating Disk Create an Optiscan Project Folder Create a new folder on your computer for Optiscan projects The folder MyProject should not already exist in this folder Start Optiscan At the MATLAB command line use the startup command You must be in the Optiscan installation directory for this to work The Optiscan Project Wizard should be displayed Step 1 Select New Optiscan Project i Open New Optiscan Project Step 2 Click the Next Button Hauke Choose the Name for your Project Step 1 Enter the Name of Your Project Per UTeIS REAR GPUC E hdl tomer aye peter Rea EAC CET aE EEE Pe TT Name the Project MyProject Directo J projhoscanS0 prai Save As Meh Browse Step 2 Click the Next Bu
90. College of Optical Sciences Choice Delta Variables CHOICE DESCRIPTION The choice description describes what the variable is used for 2 elon PES epee TE EE EE EEE ELLE NEE EE ELE ESE EEE Use XPiile eee In this case the choice is to use the X Profile CHOICE OPTION The Option Values show the available choices Option value Choose Option These Option Values allow the user to choose between using an X anda Y profiles The CHOICE DESCRIPTION is updated based on the selected Option Value Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 151 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Scalar Delta Variables Scalar Description Scalar Value Value Vector Monte Carlo Uniform Monte Carlo Gaussian Scalar Description The scalar description describes what the variable is used for Scaler Description source Wavelength Help Scalar Value A Scalar Value starts at Initial Value for the first calculation and it is incremented by Step Value in each subsequent calculation For example if the Initial Value is 1 and the Step Value is 1 then the series 1 2 3 4 5 6 would be generated The Modulo Count is used to determine when the series should be reset For example if the Modulo Count is set to two the series 12 12 12 would be generated Scaler Uptions lnitial Value 5007 Use Objects Initial Value Step alue Gel Step ppe value Modulo
91. Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 382 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences A Figure No 3 Lens Properties Editor File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help Lens Settings Lens Editor General Lens Parameters stop Surface E t lt i S Stop Diameter m ooo NA Object ooe tS HA Triage 0 043936 00O object height rm iis 4 object height ra Sin Theta m ray 0 049938 Help Cancel OK In this example a lens with a diameter of 2 5 cm will be used so change the STOP DIAMETER to 2 5e 2 6 Leave X OBJECT HEIGHT and Y OBJECT HEIGHT at 0 and leave the STOP SURFACE at 2 OptiScan automatically calculates the appropriate NA OBJECT and NA IMAGE when the lens parameters are changed 7 Click on the LENS EDITOR tab 8 The following window should now be present Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 383 9 10 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences A Figure No 3 Lens Properties Editor File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help Lens Settings Lens Editor Parameters for Surface 1 of 5 Radius ri fing Thickness m o0 Index Core Diameter m Tilt amp radians pif Tit radians 0 TitZ radians p Decenter m o Decenter r m EA Glass File MODEL Extra Data Matrix F y Element Adal BROWSE Glass Dell Add Del Help Cancel OK Since it is s
92. Count 1 Monte Carlo Uniform Monte Carlo Gaussian Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 152 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Value Vector A Value Vector is a vector of values which specifies the exact values for the Delta Parameter scaler Uptions Hilti yale Beye i Use Obiecte Initial Value Step Type rector bu Monte Carlo Uniform Monte Carlo Gaussian Value Vector 2 5 2 007 506 007 Modula Count J In this illustration the Value Vector contains two values 2 5e 7 and 5 0e 7 Because Modulo Count 1s set to two the values of the series would be Ist Value 2 5e 7 2nd Value 5 0e 7 3rd Value 2 5e 7 4th Value 5 0e 7 Hence if the scalar was associated with the value of LAMBDA for a source then the values for LAMBDA would be lst LAMBDA Value 2 5e 7 2nd LAMBDA Value 5 0e 7 3rd LAMBDA Value 2 5e 7 4th LAMBDA Value 5 0e 7 Monte Carlo Uniform Uniformly distributed random values within the specified range Using Objects Initial Value Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 153 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Scaler Options Initial Valee sepp Use Objects Initial Value Step Type te te 007 LA Monte Carlo Unifor Value Vector Monte Carlo U nitor Monte Carlo Gaussian In this illustration the value is set to le 7 so if the object s in
93. E 4 3 2 A 0 1 2 J Position MES units Variations By increasing the distance to the object one can see that the resolvability of the two point sources decreases If the thickness of the first surface is increased to 400 mm then the image size decreases by 2 3 magnification 1 3 Following the same lens editing procedure as outlined before change the thickness of surface 1 to 0 4 m and the thickness of surface 3 to 0 4 3m Also change the source and lens to use coherent light Run the simulation and view the output The following should be seen Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 416 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help Views ColorMaps Aerial irradiance Am2 y 40 Min 4 68466e 017 Max 0 000819254 Max L gok Data File plot 3 5 1 30 triat bi Look Data eT raremited 15 5 10 Value 05483 a 2 001 SS rae Help Close E Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 417 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Figure No 4 Profile Plot zz B gt File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help JOSH SB LAAL PPT x10 Aerial Irradiance m2 Profile Plot Profile Profile Aerial lrradiance wiz Value ae 2 Fe A 1S 8 GS 4 16 2 26 Position MES units 5 As can be seen from the figures sh
94. ENS PROPERTIES EDITOR Glass File MODEL Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 387 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Figure No 3 Lens Properties Editor File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help View Axis 0 015 0 01 r a p 0 005 ee Menu tens Lens Editor 0 005 0 01 0 015 si i O15 O01 005 0 005 01 015 02 025 Z axis m gt O Hep tke 16 Changing the number of rays can allow the user to see the lens aberrations more clearly To do this select VIEWER SETTINGS from the MENU ITEMS drop down menu and click GO Menu Items I viewer Settings w Properties Lens Editor 4 17 A panel will appear with the following menu options Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 388 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Bounds Lett m 019487 Right rn 025164 Hrays E Increase the number of rays from 4 to 8 Click OK 18 One can see that this lens has some aberrations from the fact that it does not image to a point Figure No 3 Lens Properties Editor Sz File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help View Axis 0 015 oo 0 005 Menu tens Viewer Settings r 0 005 0 01 0 015 E 005 01 045 02 025 Z axis m gt Help Ok 19 To get a better view of the aberrations the zoom option can be used To use this option click on
95. ILD gt TARGETS gt REFLECTIVE TARGET Create another MIRROR in the same fashion this time placing it to the right of the Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 318 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences BEAMSPLITTER 6 Create a LOOK object by selecting BUILD gt TOOLS gt LOOK and place it near the bottom 7 Create a MATHEMATICAL OPERATION object H by selecting BUILD gt TOOLS gt MATHEMATICAL OPERATION and place it near the bottom just to the left of the LOOK 8 Adjust the arrangement on the object icons so that it looks similar to the workspace below a P Tr i i i wi m L r FA Figure Mo X DH By 1 iN i 1 i kj NO O LESA TAi l System Build Accessories Help nio a a a a a a a al oa o o a a o a an an ea a a a a a o a a a oa a a o a a a a aa eaa aa a aa a a a a an aa ea a a a a a el _e emee l X a m M e Jasna AA T aaa L aaa aaar aana aaa a a aaraa a A ed ee Xi Xi Tt eae ea eae SS ee ee ec eer ee ees ee ec pes a rea ee es ee ee ee ee a ee eee Step 2 Creating the Links This section instructs the user on how to MAKE LINKS between the objects Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 319 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences First select MAKE LINK by clicking on the MAKE LINK button Make link at the top of the workspace To create the first link click on the SOURCE x
96. Id A flag variable that can be either 0 1 or 2 When printId is 0 only the calculation is performed When the value is 1 then the calculation is performed and the display is used For a value of 3 only the display is used By default the value of printId is 1 O Output none sur Displays the surface information for a lens The simplest way to use this function is to type sur Command sur sno Arguments Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 237 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences O Input sno The number of the surface that the user wishes to display The value may be a single number range or vector examples sur 1 sur 1 2 sur 1 2 4 O Output none field Displays object and image field information The simplest way to use this function is to type field Command field printId Arguments O Input printid A flag variable that can be either 0 1 or 2 When printId is 0 only the calculation is performed When the value is 1 then the calculation is performed and the display is used For a value of 3 only the display is used By default the value of printId is 1 O Output none rmsOPD Returns the rms OPD of a lens in waves OPD is relative to the chief ray in the exit pupil If specific object heights or number of rays are desired put in the argument of the function e g rmsOPD 0 10 for a y direction object height of 10 lens units
97. NEXT gt Choose the FULL WINDOW Click NEXT gt On the next screen leave things as is with the MIN at 0 and MAX at 1 and SCALE DATA and AMPLITUDE selected Click BROWSE to give the file a new name like Twyman_test_source Then click FINISH Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 328 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences lt Figure No 3 Source Properties Editor Sel File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help Views ColorMaps Magnitude Min 0 25 Max 0 999979 Max Source File hawman test source Source Mask p Source Menu bens Properties id 0 0 01 Value MaN a UOUSS0 0 01007 Step 5 Edit the Beamsplitter 1 Right click the Beamsplitter icon N and select EDIT 2 The following window should now be displayed Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 329 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences A Figure No 3 Beam Splitter Properties Editor File Edit wiew Insert Tools Window Help BMS Parameters About Transmitted Component 0 70717 0 70711 Reflected Component 0 70711 0 70711 The values seen above should be the values used We want the beamsplitter to halve the light in both directions This means it should be half transmitted and half reflected for both X and Y Step 6 Edit the Reference Mirror Setting the Dimensions 1 Right click the Mirror icon o
98. OptiScan 7 3 0 User s Manual College of Optical Sciences University of Arizona OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Table of Contents Introduction Computer Requirements Making Optiscan Writable Introduction to Optiscan OptiScan Basics a k a If you don t read anything else read this Startup Wizard Panel An Introduction to the Project Workspace Main Help Page Chapter 1 Objects About Panel Cheat Sheet Detector O Multiple Detector Example O Multiple Detector Layers Fiber Detector Source Object O Source Type Panel Beam Splitter Object O Beam Splitter Settings Panel Lens Object O Lens Editor Panel Lens Properties Panel Lens Sampling Panel Lens Setup Panel Propagation Options Panel Lens View Editor Lens Viewer Settings Aberrations Panel Link Parameters Panel Using Tilts TILTX TILTY e TILTZ 00000000 0 Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 1 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences e Targets O Target Window O Multiple Layers The Layer Manager Panel Multilayer File Format Reflective Target Transmission Target Thin film Target TFT Settings Panel TFT Layer Manager Panel Magneto Optical Target MO Settings Panel MO Layer Manager Panel O Multiple Level Lithography O O O O Multilayer Fluorescent Object Polarization Object O Polarization Se
99. Panel Fresnel Diffraction Tutorial Gaussian Beam Width Calculator Gooey Delta Panel GS Beam Shaper Sample Project Input From File Panel Introduction to OptiScan An Introduction to the Project Workspace Laser Diode Beam Calculator Laser Diode Example The Layer Manager Panel Layer Specific Gooey Delta Variables Lens Editor Panel Lens Functions Lens Properties Panel Lens Sampling Panel Lens Setup Panel Lens View Editor Lens Viewer Settings Link Parameters Panel Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 494 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Main Help Page Making OptiScan writable MOP s Custom Mathematical Operations MO Settings Panel MO Layer Manager Panel Monte Carlo Analysis Multilayer File Format Multilayer Fluorescent Target Multilayer Fluorescent Target Tutorial Multiple Detector Example Multiple Detector Layers One Dimensional Grating One Dimensional Grating Rectangular One Dimensional Grating Fourier Series Catalog One Dimensional Grating Fourier Series Direct Input One Dimensional Grating Fourier Series Trapezoid Optical Fiber Calculator Polarization Settings Panel Propagation Options Panel RCWT Calculator Reflective Target RSS Analysis Sample Projects Sampling Save Filename Panel Scalar Delta Variables Scanning Spot Tutorial Script Tool Properties Setup A Simple Disk Tutorial Copyright 2005 University of
100. Put the WAVELENGTH what you want to use in that box and click update the SIMULATOR S LAMBDA with this one Then click OK Then you will see figure s SOURCE PROPERTIES EDITOR Click CLOSE Everything is done now go to the system in the top menu bar of the main window Then scroll and click save button Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 121 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Part I 2 lens Click LENS object Then you will see LENS PROPERTIES EDITOR If PROPERTIES in the MENU ITEMS then click go At Top menu bar you will see SETUP PROPAGATION ABERRATION ILLUMINATOR SAMPLING ABOUT In the SETUP you can bring the lens file you want In the PROPAGATION you see the PROPAGATION OPTIONS In the SOURCE TO ENP you can choose the HIGH NA DIR COS In the ENP TO EXP you may choose the ABCD DIRECT In the EXP TO TARGET you can choose the HIGH NA dir cos In the ELECTROMAGNETIC CALCULATION you can choose the SCALAR Click ok Scroll menu items and change to LENS EDITOR then click GO At Top menu bar you will see LENS SESTTINGS and LENS EDITOR In the LENS SETTINGS you will see GENERAL LENS PARAMETERS Here you can change location of stop surface NA in object and NA in image side And wavelengh again In this lens NA OBJECT is 0 3 Go to next button in top menu Which is LENS EDITOR Here we have 6 surfaces Here unit is mm So 0 01 is 0 01 mm or 10um Click gt
101. Scan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences a source that contains 501 points along each side of a square matrix A Figure No 5 Source Properties Editor File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help Dimensions Source Type About Dimensions Dimension Width m 9 00025 Dimension Height m canis if Lock to 3 Offset mi Y Offset ri F M Auto Center Sampling m Be Array Size Dimension f 607 7 The source must be set to be coherent Under the SOURCE TYPE tab make sure that the COHERENT radio button is selected Click OK If an incoherent source is desired click here to view an example of some appropriate settings Note Using incoherent light increases calculation time significantly 8 On the SOURCE PROPERTIES EDITOR window select REPLACE A PIECE under the MENU ITEMS drop down menu Click GO 9 Select CHOOSE FROM CATALOGUE PATTERNS and click NEXT 10 Select UNIFORM and click NEXT 11 Be sure that the entire window is selected by clicking FULL WIN Click NEXT 12 SCALE DATA AND AMPLITUDE should be selected the MAX should be 0 and the MIN should be 0 This step creates a zero background Click NEXT 13 Click BROWSE and save the file as src2x mat This is to avoid overwriting the original information for the source Click SAVE and then click FINISH The source will now look like the following figure Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 397 14 15 1
102. TES The simplist way to use this function isto open an optics object for editing and trope wavetan If numerical output is desired put in leading brackets e OPD myRholswavefan If specific object heights number of rays etc are desired putin the argument of the function eg wavetantd 10 for a y direction object height of 1U lens units The lens units are usually millimeters The outputs of way 0 the combined fans are column vectors in which the first half is the yfan and the second half is the x Tan type helo wavetan for online help inthe MATLAB command windovy Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 254 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Auxillary Command Line Functions Slide 14 a spot diagram notes NOTES The simplist way to use this function isto open an optics object for editing and type spot_diagram If numerical outputis desired putin leading brackets eg me yey mea meL myM my my Tlagl spot diagram If specific object heights number of rays etc are desired putin the argument of the function e g spot diagrami 10 fora y direction object height of 10 tens units The lens units are usually millimeters type helo spot diagram for online help in the MATLAB command window Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 255 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona Co
103. The lens units are usually millimeters The simplest way to use this function is to type rmsOPD Command OPD Rho rmsOPD XOB YOB Nray Arguments O Input XOB X object height LENSUNITS Default is 0 YOB Y object height LENSUNITS Default is 0 Nray The number of rays traced through the lens Default is 40 O Output OPD The rms OPD in wavelengths Rho Pupil coordinate reference seidel Displays the Seidel coefficients for a lens as well as the wavefront coefficients Lagrange invariant LARG_INV and longitudinal and transverse color CL amp CT Command seidel Arguments O Input none O Output none find_chiefray_intercepts Displays the real chief ray intercepts at the last surface Command XCi YCi find_chiefray_intercepts Arguments Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 238 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences O Input none O Output XCi X coordinate of the chief ray intercept YCi Y coordinate of the chief ray intercept Fourier Transforms newfft This function calls the necessary quadrant swapping routines to perform a 1 D Fourier transform Command yy newfft N Arguments O Input N Vector to be Fourier transformed O Output yy Fourier transform of N newfft2 This function calls the necessary quadrant swapping routines to perform a 2 D Fourier transform Command yy newfft2 N Argumen
104. The overhead for the Optiscan workspace is very low The user has the full utility of Matlab available in the command line Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 28 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences interface with only three variables dedicated to the operation of Optiscan Direct Physical Representation Beam Splitter splits electric fields into a transmitted part and a reflected part Detector allows the user to specify an arbitrary detector using a BMP detector mask or any of the custom or catalog patterns Multilayer Fluorescent Target Photo resist based multiple layer lithographic target where the exposure and development in the resist is calculated Optical Lens the lens group can be created in Zemax or specified directly by the user It allows the user to select the type of propagation formulas which are used to calculate the propagation of the electric fields through the lens group Propagation can be either scalar or vector Source create and manage source fields Coherent and incoherent source types are supported Any of the custom or catalog patterns can be used Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 29 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Reflective Target can be built using bitmap masks or any of the custom or catalog patterns Thin Film Target vector interaction of focused field with
105. a College of Optical Sciences Note The 0 order is always calculated Different parameters may be varied when running the calculator theta degrees x phi degrees pi degrees lambda meters layer height meters base period meters theta This option varies the angle of incidence in the x z plane See Plane Wave Settings The units must be in degrees phi This option varies the rotational direction of the plane wave in the x y plane See Plane Wave Settings The units must be in degrees psi This option varies the polarization angle of the incoming plane wave See Plane Wave Settings The units must be in degrees lambda This option varies the wavelength of the incident plane wave This option also allows the use of a Littrow mount The units must be in meters layer height This option varies the layer heights of the layers which were set to have a variable height Unlike the other options the start and increment values for this setting are set by the calculator This is because the start is the initial total thickness of the grating all of the heights added up and the increment is a sum of all the increments of each layer This means that the number shown in the increment box defines the change in the total thickness of the grating not the change of one individual layer The stop increment must be carefully chosen with this option as it defines the final total grating thickness at which the c
106. a College of Optical Sciences Remember to save the file under a new name Figure No 3 M2 Test Mirror Properties Editor File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help Views Colorllaps Magnitude Min 1 Wax Wax Target Files E m M2 tesk mat Target Mask Bulk Reflection Menu ten Replace A Piece Editing the Mirror Depth This is the step where changes can be made to the mirror that will act as defects in the mirror O Make a small uniform defect This defect will be small and circular it will have a uniform depth and won t differ from the rest of the mirror much 1 Right click the test mirror on the righthand side of the workspace and select EDIT 2 Choose DEPTH from the TARGET MASK menu 3 To add a small piece with a uniform shape and depth to the upper right choose the REPLACE A PIECE option 4 Choose to use from catalog patterns and then select CIRCLE 5 For the WINDOW SIZE set WIDTH to 0 001 and LENGTH to 0 001 For WINDOW CENTER set X CENTER to 0 005 and Y CENTER to 0 005 6 On the SCALING screen make sure SCALE DATA and AMPLITUDE are Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 337 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences selected Set the MIN to 0 and the MAX to le 8 This is a defect of 10 nm 7 On the final screen the file should still be called what you saved it as before Go ahead and click finish A Figure No 3 M2 Test Mirror Properti
107. a single plane wave incident upon the grating structure J Figure No 3 ia l 0 x File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help Plane Wave Settings LAMBDA meters THETA degrees FHI degrees Calculate PSI degrees Diffraction Efficiency Varied Parameter No Orders No Orders theta degrees bal 3 l Ae Start Stop Increment eo es Ea Use Ditto Mounting Techmigue Reflected Calculate Diffraction Efficiency Transmitted ACW T Settings Generate Basis Set RCWT Settings The RCWT settings panel is where details about the grating structure are defined To open this panel click the RCWT Settings button on the main calculator panel The first panel displayed contains the general settings of the grating Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 277 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Figure No 3 pi e iojxj File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help RCWT Settings RCVVT Layers Layeriist Filename REAT Settings Humber of Orders 15 Base Period meters 1e 006 Humber of Periods Index of Incident Medium 1 Use Dispersion File mj hange File Index of Substrate alumihum dat M Use Dispersion File Change File Help Cancel LIE The variables shown in the previous figure are defined as follows Number of Orders Sets the number of terms to be used in the Fou
108. ad from The Save and Restore objects support two special tokens lt project gt and lt userdata gt During the simulation lt project gt is replaced with the project s root directory and lt userdata gt is replaced with the name of the userdata folder in the project s root directory Optiscan asks the user to specify the lt userdata gt folder just before the simulation begins At this time Optiscan will create that folder before it starts the simulation The user may Set the Path to any desired Path as long as that Path exists Otherwise the data files cannot be saved or restored Hence an error message concerning this will be presented to the user File Coherent Field Files Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 307 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Specifies which file contains the specified field matrices for Restoring or which file will contain the specified field matrices for Saving The Save and Restore Fields objects support automatic filename enumeration For example the filename flds ov mat will be replaced with fldsI mat flds2 mat flds3 mat The v is replaced with the visit count The visit count in this case is the number of times that the field matrices have been saved or restored by the Save or Restore Fields objects The v may lie anywhere within the filename specification See Base Index Incoherent Field Files Specifie
109. add link to chain And click the chain the this order 1t from 3 restore field object to OP 20d from OP to 4th save field object Then click the Calc then type 10 in the Chain Count Then click OK After simulation done And then click EDIT OBJECT Again go to the 3 restore object then change the base index to 1010 Then go to the save fields object And change the name test_accu_2 mat in the file Then again click the Calc then type 10 in the Chain Count Then click OK Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 126 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Part V The incoherent field is reconstructed for viewing After simulation done click clear chain Click edit object Click the 4 restore object type the test_accu_1 mat then ok Ordr of calculation is from 4 restore field to look object Then click the add link to chain Type 1 in the chain count Note To get the incoherent imaging we have to make convolution between PSF and irradiance of the geometrical image Fist you have the PSFs and geometrical images at each location of 3D x y z Second you can take an absolute value of geometrical image and square of it it becomes the irradiance Then you are ready for convolution of incoherent imaging Last do a convolution Command Line Variables width_x The width of the mlf target length_y T
110. al University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Figure No 1 olx File Edit wiew Insert Tools Window Help TET Layers Layerlist Filename About Layer Parameters Laver List 22 TFET Lael To Clipboard N Reference Z T otal Paste Last Ed Tools Import List Clipboard New Layer Help Cancel LE Fig 6 9 Click OK 10 Now click Reflection Plot to bring up Fig 7 Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 297 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences gt Figure No 3 q F olx File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help O MSiLAAS PE2 Amplitude of Reflected S component Amplitude of Reflected P component 1p 3 1 3 i 0 400 0 100 100 0 Tog Incident Angle degrees Incident Angle degrees Phase of Reflected S component Phase of Reflected P component 200 200 100 100 U E 1400 100 200 200 4 100 0 100 400 U 100 Incident Angle degrees Incident Angle degrees Fig 7 11 Without closing the window click on the main panel and choose to Plot the intensity by clicking the empty white circle next to it Click Reflection Plot Fig 8 Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 298 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Figure No 4 ig _ O x File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help Demakan PE2 Intensity of Reflected S component Intens
111. al University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Results Using Coherent Light The program generates a 2 D view of the system output by default A window similar to the following should now be seen Figure No 4 KIBI File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help Views ColorMaps Magnitude 40 Min 5 48897 e007 Max 0 647251 Mas Look Data File plot 4 8 1 2 rat Look Data Transmitted Value Q004 A 1 204e 005 Y 3 r92e 005 The irradiance W m7 of the pattern may be displayed by selecting VIEWS gt ARIAL IRRADIANCE COMPONENT from the top menu bar Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 409 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Figure No 4 File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help Views ColorMaps Aerial irradiance Wim2 edo Min 39996e 016 Max 0 000952924 Max ook Data File plot 4 5 1 2 mat hai Look Data A Transmitted Value 0002024 A 9 16e 006 Y 3 6re005 The Colormap may be adjusted such that output corresponds to what would likely be seen in a laboratory Here it is desired that the irradiance be displayed using a gray scale colormap To do this select VIEWS gt ARIAL IRRADIANCE COMPONENT and COLORMAPS gt GRAY The output will now look like the following Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 410 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Figure
112. al University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Specifying a Window Size Enter the window s size in the Window Size portion of the Window Dimensions Panel Window size Length E e 005 Width E e 005 Length The MKS length x dimension of the Window Width The MKS width y dimension of the Window Specifying a Window Center Enter the window s center in the Window Center portion of the Window Dimensions Panel Window Center Canter Center X Center The MKS center x coordinate of the Window Y Center The MKS center y coordinate of the Window The Window Buttons ined itn Automatically sets the Window Size and Window Center so that the Window is moved to the center of the plot mask Buissing Automatically sets the Window Size and Window Center so that the Window encompasses the entire plot mask J Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 99 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences See Also Dimensions Panel 2D Viewer Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 100 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences The Layout Manager Description This document describes the layer manager As the name suggests the Layer Manager lets the user manage the layers that make up a layered target The Layer Manager The Layer Parameters The Layer Tools The Extra Data Vector The Layer Manage
113. al and scientific applications System Requirements Software MATLAB 5 3 1 Internet Explorer 5 0 Hardware Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 27 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences At Least 64 megabytes of RAM At Least a 200 MHz Processor 60 MB of disk space 500 MB recommended for data storage Workspace This is an example of the Workspace System Build Accessories Help AEn iO Arrange Object 9 4 00 link to chain Edit Object E Clear chain L Delete Jbjegt ERT oe ale I I I I I La l I I I I 1 ee eee see gee The workspace is the basic user interface for Optiscan Although the Matlab command line is available to the user most of the actions required to perform calculations are performed through the workspace GUI The workspace consists of objects that are connected by links The direction of the arrow in each link shows the flow of information and can be thought of as the direction of the flow of light in the system Objects represent physical elements in the optical system like laser sources lenses targets and detectors Objects can also represent more programmatic operations like saving or retrieving data The links are placed in a chain that is evaluated sequentially The flexibility of choosing different combinations of links in chains allows the user to run slightly different simulations without making a whole new project
114. al data storage system incorporating a solid immersion lens Vol24 No 9 Opt Lett 1999 Gap induced aberrations in solid immersionlens system fin progress 1999 ector calculation affects aberrations in a solid immersion lens system in progress 1999 spot dista bution and aberration inside a recording layer in a solid immersion lens system in progress 1999 Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 450 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Thin Film Target Slide 23 Pom Appendix C Conference Papers Using Optiscan s TFT Model Joshua Ss Jo Tom D Mister Kel shimura and Kusate Hirota Gap induced aberrations ina solid immersion lens system in progress to ISOM 1999 at Kauai Hawaii Tom D Mister Kel Shimura Joshua S Jo and Kusate Hirota Pupil plane filtenna for Improved signal detection in an optical data storage system Incorporating a solid immersion lens submitted to ISOM 99 at Kaual Hawall Kusato Hirota Tom D Mister Kel Shimura Yan zhang and Joshua S Jo Near feld phase change optical recording using a GaP hemisphencal lens submitted to SOM 99 at Kaual Hay alll Tom O Mister Joshua S5 Jo Kusate Hirota and Kel Shimura The nature of the coupling field in optical data storage using solid immersion lens ISOM 96 digest Pd 15 Japan Kusate Hirota Joshua S Jo Tom D Mister High Density Phase Chang
115. alculation stops To select the stop parameter the following equation may be useful stop start m increment where m is the number of increments the user wishes to use The units for this option are meters base period This option varies the base period of the grating The units for this option are meters Basis Set Generator The basis set generator allows the user to calculate the output fields of the grating for an arbitrary input field Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 284 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences a File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help Basis Set Generator Settings Harmar Polarization F Y Polarization Pups E 2 Polarization lambda PupS d 0 5 Change Output File s Generate The variables available to the user are NAmax The maximum numerical aperture of the input fields PupS An integer fraction of the angular spectrum sampling of the reflected wave front The fields are saved to files which may be used in the workspace with the aid of MOPs A different file must be specified for each polarization To change the filenames click the Change Output File s button The files must be saved to the userdata folder of the current project A preprogrammed MOP for using the basis set files in the workspace is available at oscan html rcwt_calc_panel RCWTpupMAP m Dispersion Files A dispersion file describes the cha
116. an operates in the MATLAB environment and all of the commands available to MATLAB users are also available to OptisScan users The motivation for developing the OptisScan program came from an interest in efficient use of student time Over the last sixteen years our research group has developed many very powerful simulation codes for various applications like optical data storage and laser scanning Each time a new Student joins our group it takes a significant amount of time to learn the codes An average learning curve was about six months I wanted to design an easy to use graphical user interface that would connect the different codes in order to shorten the learning curve Although it took over a year to get OptisScan to a useable state the results are worth it In one case a student started with no knowledge of the program and was producing results in less than one hour At this point not all of the features are operational but we are working on it We will continue to develop the program and provide new features as time marches on I hope that you have as much fun using OptisScan as I have had writing it Tom Milster Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 7 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences OptiScan Basics a k a If you don t read anything else read this OptiScan works by segmenting various portions of optical simulation problems into objects For example a laser source can
117. ancel g Prey Next gt 6 Save all the changes the file should still have the same name and the final result for the depth should look like that below Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 335 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Figure No 3 M1 Reference Mirror Properties Editor Sel File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help Views ColorMaps Magnitude iin U Max 1e 006 Max Target Files Ex M1 reflect mat Target Mask Depth rhlenu theme Replace A Piece nd Lo Step 7 Edit the Test Mirror This is the key mirror of the system This is the test piece that will be simulated to have defects and then viewed with the interferometer This step will describe how some defects can be added Setting the Dimensions 1 The dimensions of this mirror should be the same as the previous mirror 2 These should be WIDTH 0 02 LENGTH 0 02 X OFFSET 0 01 Y OFFSET 0 X SAMPLING 7 8125e 5 Y SAMPLING 7 8125e 5 3 Remember to make sure that the WINDOW DIMENSIONS are set for the FULL WINDOW Editing the Bulk Reflection 1 Once again the reflection should be a uniform 1 2 GO through the same steps outlined above Step 6 Editing Reference Mirror Editing the Bulk Reflection to make the BULK REFELECTION a uniform 1 Make sure it looks like that below Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 336 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizon
118. and then click on the BEAMSPLITTER Make sure to keep this order and that the arrow points to the BEAMSPLITTER A neat feature of Optiscan is that two links connecting the same two objects can overlap It is important to keep some links separate from each other when simulating but they need to connect the same objects To create a second link similar steps are performed Click on the SOURCE and then click on the BEAMSPLITTER The arrow should now appear green signifying that there are two links there Create a link from the BEAMSPLITTER to the MIRROR on the right Then create another link between the two objects but in the opposite direction MIRROR to BEAMSPLITTER Create a link from the BEAMSPLITTER to the MIRROR on the right and then a link in the opposite direction of the two Create a link from the BEAMSPLITTER to the MATHEMATICAL OPERATION and then create another link on top of it in the same direction Create a link from the MATHEMATICAL OPERATION to the LOOK object The workspace should look like the one below Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 320 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences ie eaten i 7 MOTE A a a at ae FrIPFUre m0 Z pE SLAM 1 01 1 Lee PT Leste System Build Accessories Help m az zn m s m mm m m ee ee ee ee a a a a a a a a m a m a a a laa m a a a e a a u a m a al
119. ant Should be 1 0 Distance MKS of the propagation steps that subdivide a layer The simplest setting is Z Step Z Total if the layer thickness is much less than a wavelength Total thickness MKS of the layer This is a command option that allows a magnification demagnification of the spatial scale between successive steps It is only used in special cases Usually it is set so that GrowFac 1 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Tools The Layer Manager Panel offers three 3 tools import List i ens mpat bist Imports a previously Impor Layer 7 created layer list NewLayer f o lt Import Layer Imports a previously E created layer Creates a new layer The layer data is set to 0 NewLayer The Extra Data Vector The extra data vector is used to provide data input to programs that process the layers Extra data vector 100 Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 104 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Multilayer File Format Description This document describes the file format used for the multilayer style objects These include such objects as the multilayer target and multilayer vector target Layer List File Format The Layer List Format is as follows layer_list struct class target_list 1 layer_fnames cell array of filenames layer_pa
120. apture a picture of the diffraction pattern To obtain a profile of the diffraction pattern import the image into a numerical analysis Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 465 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences program such as Matlab and use the bitmap data to provide values for your plot Analysis amp Results 0 9 0 5 OF 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 20 A BU ol 100 120 140 160 180 20 These pictures were taken at L 12 304 8 mm One can see that the results from the lab and the results produced by OptiScan are in good agreement with each other The small blemishes noticed in the diffraction pattern are caused by dust located on the protective glass plate that Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 466 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences covers the CCD Variations By decreasing L the number of peaks may be increased as is observed in the following figures Figure No 3 KB File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help Views ColorMaps Aerial Irradiance Wim p40 Min 1 21756e 011 Max 0 00267287 Max ook Data File plot 2 5 1 2mat Look Data Transmitted Value UUU0SS6T A WUUUTTS v 8 f33e 005 Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 467 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences JA Figure Mo 4 Profile Plot Seles File Edit
121. at are used throughout Optiscan to perform particular actions The lens uses several of these prompts Command Line Functions Auxiliary Command Line Functions O pupil fir sur field seidel rayfan wavetan spot diagram find chiefray intercepts O O O O O OOO Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 234 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Command Line Functions Note Optiscan must be running in order to use these functions Gaussians sgausld Implementation of the so called Supergaussian This function creates a vector of ones within the specified length and filling zeros outside the length Command yy sgaus1D L d ox LARGENUM Arguments O Input I Length of vector d Half width of ones pattern 1 e when LARGENUM 1 ox Offset in x direction pixels LARGENUM Power to which the exponent is raised example yy exp v 2 LARGENUM where v is defined by x and r O Output yy Vector containing the Supergaussian information suprgaus Implementation of the so called Supergaussian This function creates a circle of ones within the specified radius and filling zeros outside the radius The circle is centered in the middle of the array Command yy suprgaus N r offdu offlr LARGENUM Arguments O Input N Size of square array r Radius of circle in index units 1 e value when LARGENUM 1 offdu Offset in the y direction
122. at half max in the y direction Hermite X The order of the hermite polynomial in the x direction Hermite Y The order of the hermite polynomial in the y direction Angle Rotates the final pattern degrees Mix And Match Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 194 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Figure No 3 Source Properties Editor Fie Edt View Insert Took Window Help A Pattern Gaus Y Pattern Patten Parameters MES FAHM A If Radius i0 x Laser Diode Cabcubator Optical Fiber Calculator Gaussian Beam Width Calculator Help Cancel t Prev Hest Mix And Match Parameters X Pattern May select Exponential Gaussian or SuperGaussian Y Pattern May select Exponential Gaussian or SuperGaussian FWHM X Full width at half max in the x direction FWHM Y Full width at half max in the y direction Radius Controls the radius LargeNum defines the shape of the gaussian If you increase LargeNumX the peak becomes broader and the sides steeper Angle Rotates the final pattern degrees Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 195 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Finishing The next step involves which portion of the source you wish to replace add multiply with the selected pattern Figure No 3 Source Properties Editor fol Window Size width Be 006 Length ee
123. ating Direct Input Fourier Series Grating Trapezoid Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 207 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences One Dimensional Grating Fourier Series Direct Input Description Creates a one dimensional grating pattern using a Fourier transform Getting Started Base Period Center Shift Angle Coefficients Finishing the Wizard See Also Getting Started Right click on the object in which a one dimensional grating is desired The object can be a target source detector or any object using the 2D viewer Click edit to bring up the properties editor Choose Replace A Piece from Menu Items and click go When the Replace A Piece wizard comes up choose One Dimensional Grating and click next When the next panel comes up choose Fourier Series Direct Input and click next You will then see the following panel Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 208 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Founer Seres Grating direct input Base Period 46 006 Center Shift l 1 006 Angle l T Coefficients al fe b E az fe be lo a3 fo bo Te ad E bf C a5 __ b5 fo ab e bE lo ar A Er E i ag a bg ag 0 ba i all it b10 fie Base Period Important Note If the chosen period is too close to the sampling of the object results may be unpredictable If you experience problems with this increase your
124. ay angle installed The beam focused down to the bottom of Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 433 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Thin Film Target Slide 6 a The Optics Lens Propagation Options Souceto ENP ENF40 EXP EX 4to Terget Direc Curec 7 ABCD Cres Nona Curved EXD For our calculation we use the direct curved option for calculation from the source to entrance pupil ABCD direct for entrance to exit pupil and None curved EXP option for exit pupil to target Click Hep for more information of these options Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 434 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Thin Film Target Slide 7 __The Eatin glens Se a ee ee a Chan 2 fevcetarn lat otep 6 system D Click and edit the Lens object Click the Lens Editor in the menu items We use the NA Image 1 3 Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 435 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Thin Film Target Slide 8 4 Figure No 3 Thin Film Targel Properfes Editur File Ecc Windaw cele scott TFT Settings FT Laye s ayer st lene Edit refractive index of the TET incer Set ys poenecr incident material and substrate en Change the TFT index seftin Sea The refractive index Seniesa gs
125. ay be specified by a dispersion file The following list is a description of the different buttons located in the layers panel New Layer Creates a new layer Copy Copies the currently selected layer to the clipboard Cut Cuts the currently selected layer from the layer list Paste Pastes the most recently cut or copied layer to the layer list before the currently selected entry Paste Last Pastes the most recently cut or copied layer to the end of the layer list Import List Imports a previously saved grating structure Preview Button This button allows the user to view the grating structure that he she has specified The preview window shows the dimensions of the grating in meters Here is a sample preview using the single layer grating defined in the previous figure Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 280 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Figure No 4 gz im G x File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help DERS kA BPT x10 i OS aluminum dat Layerlist Filename This panel allows the user to choose the name of the file where the grating is saved The file can only be saved to the default targets folder To change the filename simply click on the browse button The grating will be saved when the user clicks OK Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 281 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona Colleg
126. bout Delta Parameters Click Add To Add Variables Remove Add Help Cancel OK Next click add and the dialog box below will appear x Add Which arable Obiect Height Y Object Height Stop Diameter Lambda Surface Specific Uk Lancel Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 168 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Click Surface Specific Variable then click OK to display the Surface Specific Gooey Delta Panel Surface Specific Gooey Delta Panel Figure No 4 Ea 0 x Surface Parameters Surface List 2 Radius fo AS PEOERA Thickness i SSPEUERE Iridex gt ASPLOERS Conic SSP EGER Diameter Go SoPederle Talk es fo eS PRGERTE Tilt 7 Tilt Decenter Fs ae Yee Ie eee dee ee Rs Be Decenter t Help Cancel Create Click on the surface number you want to modify and then click the name of the variable Click create and you will be brought back to the regular Gooey Delta Variable panel Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 169 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Figure No 3 Delta Properties Editor i x File Edit Tools Window Help Variable Tool About Dela Parameters Scaler Description Surface 1 RADILIS Surface Specific Vartable Scaler Uptions lritial ale Use Objects Initial Value Step Value Zep De Value zj Hiodulo Count R
127. ch Group Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 365 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Scanning Spot Tutorial Slide 4 a ideal laser source ee Ay 1h ee oe eee An to ase aes a pelos 1 Edit the source by right mouse click on the x T pe ci lea dor TATIE py ay is r ae ga g e SOL H i a Ligure Ha Source l has Lala ck source i open es Se Ba wince due ae et Magnitudle bein 2412725 bas 1 The user will notice 1 The source is a gaussian TEM 00 source 2 The source has a diameter of 4mm 3 The source is off set by 2mm in the x direction to center the source inthe sagittal plane Edit the source type 1 The source has a wavelength of 0 5um 2 The source is temporally and spatially coherent a ce Te Milster Research Group Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 366 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Scanning Spot Tutorial Slide 5 a ICAL DATA STORAGE CENTER Ideal focusing Optics Focusing Low NA 1 Edit the focusing optics tics by right m ouse click oi te ne first optics object from the left side of the Cask The user will notice 1 Low NA to high NA focusing optics Optical system 2 Click prope les Go to Inok at itie Jere stop disk properties of the focusi g optics plane The user will notice nes Properties windon
128. coherent lensib Daa File lepidla Browse The Browse button will bring up a file dialog box which is used to find the Optiscan Lens File or the Zemax Lens Prescription Text file After an input file is selected a second file dialog box is used to let the user specify the name of the imported lens Note The name for the saved lens given in the second dialog box cannot be the same name as the lens chosen in the first dialog box The imported lens is stored in the project s lenslib folder See also Aberrations Panel Auxiliary Command Line Functions Lens Functions Lens Tilts Lens Editor Panel Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 76 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Lens Functions Lens Properties Panel Lens Sampling Panel Lens View Editor Lens Viewer Settings Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 77 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Propagation Options Panel Description The Propagation Options Panel is used to specify what types of calculations are used to model the light as it propagates through a lens group Propagations Options The Propagations options Propagation Options Input to lene 1 Propagation through lens 2 Propagation to target 3 Smal coherent source Simple pupil to pupil mappin Focused beam NOMbeP ot rave dona thediameter of the mumi 1 Chiel ray refere
129. cription Applied MATLAB operation Magnitude abs data elie Real real data w magnitude Aerial Irradiance Component faal Aerial Irradiance Component Aerial Irradiance Total Aerial Irradianee Total Imaginary imag data Imaginary Phase Phase angle data The title of the plot displays both the maximum and the minimum value displayed The Color Bar to the left of the plot shows the association between color and the value of individual plot points The top of the Color Bar is mapped to the maximum value and the bottom of the Color Bar is mapped to the minimum value ColorMap Menu The ColorMap menu allows you to change the colormap of the plot The default colormap 1s hot Available Colormaps gray linear grayscale colormap hot varies smoothly from black through shades of red orange and yellow to white hsv varies the hue component of the hue saturation value color model The colors begin with red pass through yellow green cyan blue jet ranges from blue to red and passes through the colors cyan yellow and orange It is a variation of the hsv colormap The jet colormap is associated with an astrophysical fluid jet simulation from the National Center for Supercomputer Applications Point Value Area As the mouse moves over the plot the value of the plot point under the mouse cursor is displayed in the Point Value Area Value 0 2055 71 008e 006 Y 2595 006 The Poi
130. culator Optical Fiber Calculator RCWT Calculator Thin Film Calculator Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 3 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Chapter 8 File Operations Save Filename Panel Fields Panel Chapter 9 User Defined Operations Custom Mathematical Operations MOP s Chapter 11 Tutorials Tutorials Main Page O O O O O O O O O O Simulate Scanning a Laser Beam Over a Target A Simple Disk Tutorial Scanning Spot Tutorial Lens Functions Auxiliary Command Line Functions Lens Tilts Creating a Thick Lens Coherent and Incoherent Point Source Imaging Convert a Coherent Source to an Incoherent Source Incoherent Lens Settings TFT Fresnel Diffraction Multilayer Fluorescent Target Chapter 12 Sample Projects GS Beam Shaper Reference Troubleshooting and FAQs User Notes Index Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 4 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Computer Requirements Optiscan requires the following software MATLAB 6 5 2 Internet Explorer 5 0 Zemax Lens Editor for importing lens files only Optiscan requires the following hardware At Least 512 MB of RAM At Least a 1 GHz Processor 100 MB of disk space 500 MB recommended for data storage Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 5 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University
131. d About Edit Delete Links Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 19 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Links are used to specify how electric fields propagate through an OPTISCAN model See the Links page for more information The following model shows the electric fields propgating from a source to a reflective target to a plot When Make Link is activated clicked on links can be created by clicking on the object which is the source on the electric field and i then clicking on the object which the electric field is being propagated Delete link to Make link Edit link When Edit Link is activated clicked on the properties of a link can be displayed for modification by clicking on it The following image shows what happens when a link s type is changed When Delete Link is activated clicked on the links in the project workspace can be deleted by clicking on them An OPTISCAN link shows how an electric field propagates from one optics object to the next A chain specifies the order in which the links are evalulated In the following system Add link to chain Clear chain The link labeled 0 1 is evaluted first the link labeled T 2 is evaluated second and the link labeled R 3 is evaluated last Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 20 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Scie
132. d X read write simdata Eyt Current value for Transmitted Field Y read write simdata Ezt Current value for Transmitted Field Z read write Current value for Reflected Field X read write simdata Eyr Current value for Reflected Field Y read write simdata Ezr Current value for Reflected Field Z read write abcissa vector for the fields read write simdata sysyvec ordinate vector for the fields read write simdata LAMBDA the value for LAMBDA read write simdata SourceType the source s type read write coherent 2 incoherent simdata SourceTypePoints number of source points if SourceType equals 2 read write simdata NextObject the instance of the next object see curlink read write this is typically the most important simdata variable that a delta function uses look at the scripttool s predefined scripts more which show how NextObject can be used simdata VisitCount Number of times that this object has been calculated read only simdata ChainIndex When objects are added to a chain an array of objects read only is created simdata ChainIndex is the location of the Delta Object in this array errmsg If delfunc wishes to report an error it would execute something similar to the following code fragment errmsg Invalid Parameter Value for Stop Diameter Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 147 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual U
133. diodes One of the main uses of this calculator is to lookup or calculate values to use in the custom pattern generator Most laser diode specifications list far field divergence in degrees while Optiscan works with the spot size in meters Transmission target A new target is available that operates on an incident two dimensional field with a matrix representing complex index of refraction and depth information See the help pages for more information Various improvements are made to the optics module that allow better accuracy for high NA systems and micro optical systems Propagation object angular spectrum propagation Upgraded to work with negative distances The interface panel is updated to be more user friendly Now works with incoherent sources Improved descriptions of the reflection target and the new transmission target are available in the help pages Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 24 10 11 2 13 14 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Version 10 Zemax files can now be used with OPTISCAN If OPTISCAN encounters part of the lens description that it can t decode that part of the lens description is printed in the command line window Axis menu in the Lensview panel Axis settings such as normal and equal can be entered via the menu bar User Notes Page A new help page accessible from the Main help desk that lists
134. ditor File Edit Yiew Insert Tools Window Help Scaling f Scale Data Amplitude C Phase Phase Option only works wher multiplying C Do Not Re scale Data a piece Scaling useage Bitmaps 1 The bitmap values are first scaled between 0 black and white Black through gray to white is the most straightforward wap to do the scaling However RGB values can be used in an tms sense That is map value sqrt red 2 green 2 blue 1 The O to 1 scaled map is then assigned Values on a linear scale with D walue pixels assigned the value of Min and 1 value pixels assigned the value of Mar mat files 1 The values are scaled according to the following formula output data input data Mas Min Mir custom patterns TF rio rescaling Is desired select Do Not Fie scale Help Cancel lt Prey Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 218 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Dimensions Panel Description The Dimensions Panel allows the specify the dimensions the offsets and the sampling of an optiscan object A discussion of the coordinate vectors is located at the end Specifying the Dimensions Enter the dimensions in the Dimensions portion of the Dimensions Panel Dimensions Length Width eto Length The MKS length x dimension of the object Width The MKS width y dimension of the object Specifyin
135. e if istransmitted curlink Sthe input linktype is transmitted elseif isreflected curlink S6the input linktype is reflected else San electric field is not explicitly being transmitted to Sthe MOP object end For the following configuration Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 313 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences the istransmitted curlink function would return true since the input link is propagating transmitted electric fields to the MOP object The electric fields can be retrieved through the simdata variable Ext simdata Ext transmitted fields Eyt simdata Eyt Ezt simdata Ezt Exr simdata Exr reflected fields Eyt simdata Eyr Ezt simdata Ezr The ordinate and abcissa vectors can be similarly queried using Sysxvec simdata sysxvec x positions of each column Sysyvec simdata sysyvec y positions of each row After the function is finished modifying the fields and or the ordinate and abcissa vectors it needs to update the simdata variable using simdate Ext Ext simdata Eyt Eyt etc The MOP function may wish to save some information between invocations The simdata variable allows the function to retrieve the custom user data that 1s associated with a specific MOP object by using userdata simdata userdata if isempty userdata 6need to initialize the userdata userdata sinvector sin linspace 0 2 pi 100 userdata cosvector
136. e Optical Recording Using a Solid Immersion Lens p 24 Vol 3401 SPIE 1993 at Aspen USA Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 451 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Tutorial Fresnel Diffraction from a Circular Aperture Description The purpose of this tutorial is to instruct the user on how to look at the Fresnel diffraction pattern from a circular aperture that is illuminated by a plane wave Theory How the Program Works Step 1 Place and Edit a Source Step 2 Propagating Step 3 Observing the System Output Step 4 Linking the Elements Step 5 Creating a Chain Step 6 Running a Simulation and Viewing the Output Results Comparison with Experiment Variations References See Also Theory Fresnel Diffraction Near field diffraction otherwise known as Fresnel diffraction can be described by the projection of Fresnel zones onto an aperture or obstruction 1 If the aperture used is circularly symmetric then the near field diffraction pattern is circularly symmetric as well Assuming that the aperture is clear and is illuminated by plane waves the number of peaks in the profile of the diffraction 2 pattern is given by the equation ar _ amp where N is known as the Fresnel Number 1O AL The variables are defined as a radius of the diffracting aperture wavelength of the incident plane wave L observation distance from the diffracting apert
137. e SAMPLING section enter 0 004 512 in the X SAMPLING and Y SAMPLING dialogue boxes This will create a source that contains 512 points along each side of a square matrix A Figure No 3 Source Properties Editor KB File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help Dimensions Source Type About Dimensions Dimension Width m fas Dimension Height ml ana i Lock to 2 Offset ma Y Offset m g W Auto Center Sampling ri 7 827 Ge 006 Array Size Dimension 572 Help Cancel LIE Click OK On the SOURCE PROPERTIES EDITOR window select REPLACE A PIECE under the MENU ITEMS drop down menu Click GO Select CHOOSE FROM CATALOGUE PATTERNS and click NEXT Select UNIFORM and click NEXT Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 455 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences 11 Be sure that the entire window is selected by clicking FULL WIN Click NEXT 12 SCALE DATA AND AMPLITUDE should be selected the MAX should be 0 and the MIN should be 0 This step creates a zero background Click NEXT 13 Click BROWSE and save the file as src2x mat This is to avoid overwriting the original information for the source Click SAVE and then click FINISH The source will now look like the following figure A Figure Mo 3 Source Properties Editor Sele File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help Views ColorMaps Magnitude Min U Wax Wax Source File sro2x mat Source Ma
138. e of Optical Sciences RET Settings REWI Layers Layerlist Filename Specity Output File Directory c ascaniworktunccalcrewharcwt_oby basestargets Save As basercit mat Browse Plane Wave Settings The plane wave settings box is located on the main calculator panel This function allows the user to calculate the electric field reflected from or transmitted through the grating for a particular plane wave To calculate the electric field click the calculate button Plane Wave Settings LAMBDA meters Fe O07 THETA degrees lo PHI degrees 0 Calculate FSI degiees 0 The variables are described in the list below LAMBDA This is the wavelength of the incident light in meters This wavelength is used also for the diffraction efficiency calculator and basis set generator THETA This is the angle of incidence of the plane wave This value may vary from 90 to 90 PHI This is the rotation angle of the plane wave in the x y plane If PHI 0 then the plane wave is in the x z plane If PHI 90 then the plane wave is located in the y z plane This value may vary between 0 and 360 PSI This is the polarization of the incident plane wave The range of values can be from 0 and 360 PHI 90 is s polarized light and PHI 0 is p polarized light The following figure gives a graphical interpretation of THETA PHI and PSI Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 282 OptiScan 6 2 0 U
139. e polynomial or Mix And Match which specifies separate X and Y patterns to be combined SuperGaus Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 192 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Figure No 3 Source Properties Editor File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help i Hermite C MisAnd blatch Pattern Parameters td KS FWHMX eo WANY a Phadnis i iE Wz Large ura t Ee nn Largeur i Hernies Eoo Hemme t Laser Diode Calculator Optical Fiber Calculator Gaussian Beam Width Calculator Help Cancel lt Prey Newt gt For the SuperGaus pattern there are only two parameters e FWHM X the full width at half max in the x direction LargeNum lt X lt defines the shape of the gaussian If you increase LargeNumX the peak becomes broader and the sides steeper Hermite Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 193 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Figure No 3 Source Properties Editor Fie Edt Yew Insert Toots Window Help Pattems SuperGaus ind Hermite C wesAnd Match Patten Parameters MES PHM 1 005 PHM T 2 006 Hemite fi Hermite ii Angle CE Laser Diode Cabculator Optical Fiber Cabculator Gaussian Beam Width Calculator Helo Cancel Prey Mest gt Hermite Parameters FWHM X Full width at half max in the x direction FWHM Y Full width
140. e than one detector is used in a project they each must be named differently This is done in the last step of editing the detector responsivity The user must uniquely specify the filename that the detector pattern is saved under Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 47 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences J3 Figure No 5 Detector Properties Editor Seles File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help Specify Output File Directory D oscan proy detector demno detectors Save As new detector mat New Name Help Cancel Prey Finish Using the Detector Once the desired detector pattern is generated the user links the detector into the project workspace Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 48 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences a al J rieure Mo UP PSCAN 1 01 Ee detector cdemo mat Eg System Build Accessories Help an ra E ese a a a a eee ee oe oe oe Le New Detector l ee In this particular workspace the DELTA object is used to simulate a scanning system The light from the source is scanned over the target and then imaged onto the detector At each scan position the integrated irradiance on the detector is saved to the data file specified for the detector The format of the data file is a simple ascii text file that 1s tab delimited The following table is a sa
141. eace Pest Pe Sl ee Running a simulation determines the amount of power transferred from the optical system to the fiber i e the coupling efficiency The format of the data file is a simple ASCH text file that is tab delimited The following is a sample of how the data looks when imported into a spreadsheet 3 52113298e 001 3 87943 17 1e 001 3 95755503e 001 3 84127019e 001 15 32 43 3 52113298e 001 3 87943171e 001 3 95755503e 001 3 84127019e 001 15 32 47 3 52113298e 001 3 87943171e 001 3 95755503e 001 3 84127019e 001 15 32 50 3 52113298e 001 3 87943 17 1e O01 3 95755503e 001 3 84127019e 001 15 32 53 The first three columns represent the coupling efficiencies resulting from the X Y and Z polarizations of the electric field incident upon the end of the fiber The fourth column is the total coupling efficiency for all three polarizations together The last column is a timestamp which lets the user know at what time the data were taken Note that Optiscan will ONLY APPEND the detector data file it will never overwrite it This means that if the user wishes to perform a fresh simulation with no initial data in the output file either the filename of the previous simulation needs to be changed or the detector output filename must be changed or deleted Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 60 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Important Equat
142. ected then the Number of rays along the diameter of the pupil edit is enabled This parameter determines the number of grid points Number of rays 2 for the Ray Trace No calculations are performed on the input fields at this point The field in the plane of the exit pupil propagates to the target plane The field in the exit pupil reference sphere propagates to an out of focus plane One application for this option is to describe light shining on a out of focus detector This option should not be used when the last surface of the lens is near a focal plane The field calculations are halted at the exit pupil This option can be be used to view the exit pupil of the lens Copyright 2005 University of Arizona OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Electromagnetic Calculation Portion The Electromagnetic Calculation panel is used to Electromagnetic Calculation Scalar C Vector Scalar The x y and z electromagnetic fields are propagated independently and no polarization mixing is calculated Vector When focusing beams from the exit pupil to the target polarization mixing is calculated in order to determine the proper spot profiles Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 80 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Lens View Editor Purpose The Lens View Editor allows the user to see their lens plotted g
143. ector mask see Optiscan Viewer Scanning Demo Look Object allows the user to look at results graphically during a simulation run see Optiscan Viewer Mathematical Operation perform custom calculations on the system s electric fields see Configurable Variables Easy Editing of Custom Script Variables Script Tool Custom Scripts Optical Lens load a lens group created in zemax allows the user to select the type of propagation formulas which are used to calculate the propagation of the electric fields through the lens group see Lens Viewer Lens Editor Propagation Methods Lens Settings Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 42 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Polarization Object see Polarization Properties Angular Spectrum propagation see Angular Spetctrum Parameters Restore Fields restore electric fields to disk see Fields Panel Source Type Save Fields save electric fields to disk see Fields Panel Source create and manage source fields using 256 color bitmaps coherent and incoherent source types are supported see Optiscan Viewer Source Type Reflective Target create and manage reflective targets a reflective target is built using 256 color bitmap masks see Reflective Target Optiscan Viewer Window Panel Thin Film Target create thin film targets see TFT Layer Manager Panel Tft Demo Tft Settings
144. eds to be created before being able to use this function To create it first set up a zvec variable like the one in the example below Afterwards use this command save filepath filename zvec Remember that this should be in the project s optics folder The information box titled Zernike File should show the correct directory to save the file in To edit the file just load it into the Matlab workspace and save it again Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 87 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences zvec has the following format zvec 1 order of the Zernike expansion zvec 2 sampling in the pupil This is the number of points across the pupil diameter that are used to calculate the initial Zernike distribution The Zernike phase map resulting from the calculation will be resampled according to the sampling Npupil specified in the optics module so it is recommended that zvec 2 be greater than Npupil zvec 3 through zvec i contain the Zernike coefficients as specified in Malacara Optical Shop Testing Example zvec 3 10000000000 0 33 OJ This zvec produces a third degree Zernike expansion that uses 100 points across the diameter of the pupil for the initial calculation This particular choice of coefficients exhibits 1 0 wave of coma in the y direction with 0 33 waves of tilt Zernike Polynomials U m Up to Fourth Degree zvec i Zernike component polynomial meet ooo I
145. egrees Incident Angle degrees Fig 3 transmission curve plots Now let s try a stack with several layers leaving the previous settings the same 5 Open the Change Layers window 6 Press the button New Layer It now shows two layers total with layer out of 2 selected Fig 4 Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 294 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Figure No 1 il olx File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help TFT Layers Layerlist Filename About Laver List 1 2 Layer Parameters N Reference 1 To Clipboard Z T otal 1e 007 Paste Last Ed Tools Import List Clipboard New Laver Help Cancel GK Fig 4 7 In the Layer Parameters section select Layer 1 and change the N Reference to 1 3 and the Z Total to 0 5E 7 Fig 5 Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 295 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences sJ Figure No 1 olx File Edit wiew Insert Tools Window Help TFT Layers Layerlist Filename About Laver List 1 2 Layer Parameters N Reference 13 To Clipboard T otal ce 00a Paste Last Ed Tools Import List Clipboard New Layer Help Cancel LE Fig 5 8 Now select Layer 2 and change its values to 1 4 and 9E 7 Fig 6 Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 296 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manu
146. ek pep sete Hover tie aata layers it ditfracts The fields after the pro object can be wiere dedit After the FLU DFESCEHT OBJEL T it takes some tite to buildup the fields for the look object Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 479 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Multilayer Fluorescent Target Slide 6 a CAPTICAL DATA STORAGE CENTER _ OP TISCAN Hep Flee tr incolere stimagig 5 Fart I 1 Interact the Whirnimation beara with the data layers with the z FLUORESCENT OBJECT Depthoffoms DOF lanbda n NA Step size indel object i caleu lated based on DOF for example If the data has size Ahim Thicktarr of a ae thickness m zaxis WA Fach fap O45 lanbda O 6851m n am 15 Then DOF 820m 20 choose step size mnm Then I need to calculate 10 planes due to dmi A lOplares We reed to 10 plares thickness ofwhich i 4am Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 480 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Multilayer Fluorescent Target Slide 7 a GETAL DATA STORAGE CENTER M _ OP TISCAN Hep Flee tr ibcobere stimagig 5 Part Il 1 Interact the Ihun mation beara with the data layers with the FLUORES CENT OBJECT 7 ir laguna ant a l The layers are configured with the manage layers option in the fhiorescent abject The background is black zero to represe
147. el Lens Setup Panel Lens View Editor Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 85 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Aberrations Panel Description The Aberrations Panel is used to add aberration into the lens calculations Aberration Calculation Portion None No aberration calculations are performed Custom File The aberration data is loaded from the specified file Here opd contains the aberration data The aberration data should be stored in the project s optics folder Ray Trace Use a Ray Trace to calculate the aberrations If the Save Result check box is checked then the resulting aberration calculation is saved to the specified file Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 86 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Here the Ray Trace calculation is stored in a file called opd1 mat Hiis Eire a che r a r E a a a R a e a a ia E a a aia Ea i R ia a ea ii e i a ii a Bk ee Be Bk 4 The output of the ray trace calculation is stored in the project s optics folder Zernike Use the Zernike polynomial coefficients which are found in the specified Zernike coefficient file to calculate the aberrations Here the file zerndata mat contains the required Zernike coefficients Zernike coefficient files should be stored in the project s optics folder The mat file must contain the vector zvec This file ne
148. eld Exr Reflected X field Eyr Reflected Y field Ezr Reflected Z field Additionally there are two coordinate vectors Vector Name Description sysxvec coordinate vector for the columns sysyvec coordinate vector for the rows The Rule Each field matrix must have the same matrix dimensions The Exception A field matrix may be a scalar such as 0 By using a scalar 0 when appropriate instead of a n x m matrix of zeros memory is saved and the simulation s calculation time is reduced Specifying which fields to Save Restore The Use Which Fields portion of the Fields Panel allows the user to specify which fields are saved or restored If fields are being restored the file must contain the sysxvec and sysyvec coordinate vectors If fields are being saved then the simulator will save its sysxvec and sysyvec coordinate vectors along with the specified fields Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 306 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Lise Which Fields M Transmitted M Reflected M Transmitted WM Reflected 2 Transmitted M 2 Retlected Specifying which files to Save Restore The Use Which File portion of the Fields Panel allows the user to specify which fields are saved or restored Use Field File Path project gt lt userdata gt File filds mat Base Index 1000 ret Path Specifies which path the data should be written re
149. elected layer This number is expressed in meters This height may also be varied when using the diffraction efficiency calculator To vary the height simply check the box next to vary height and select the increment value in meters you wish to use Duty Cycle This field requires a vector that specifies the points at which the index changes across one period of the grating Each entry of the vector is defined as a fraction of the base period and each layer has its own duty cycle For example the duty cycle from the previous figure 1s 0 3 0 7 as can be seen in the duty cycle dialogue box Given that the base period is 1 micron this layer s duty cycle specifies that Index fills in the region from 0 to 0 3 microns 0 3 base_period Index 2 fills in from 0 3 microns to 0 7 microns 0 3 base_period to 0 7 base_period and Index 1 fills in from 0 7 microns to 0 1 micron This is more easily seen in the picture shown below Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 279 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences DBE period Index 1 The index that fills in the regions between the 1 and 2 3 4 and 4 5 and 6 etc entries of the duty cycle This value may be held constant or may be specified by a dispersion file Index 2 The index that fills in the regions between the 2 and 3 4 t and 5 6 and 7 etc entries of the duty cycle This value may be held constant or m
150. emove Add Calculation Options Debug Parameter Flag vector Every Help Cancel OF So far all Surface Specific Gooey Delta variables are scalar so you can look at the Scalar Delta Variable page for more information on how to set them up Delta Variable Calculation Options The value of a Delta Parameter does not need to be updated during every simulation step The scheduling of a Delta Parameter calculation is done by using the Calculations Options Calculation Options Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 170 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Summary of Options Every The Delta Parameter is updated each time that the Gooey Delta is calculated First The Delta Parameter is updated the first time that the Gooey Delta is calculated Last The Delta Parameter is updated on the last chain calculation Note links have Calculation Options associated with them Hence the Gooey Delta may not be calculated on the last chain calculation if the link s Calculation Options don t permit the Gooey Delta to be calculated on the last calculation Flagged A user supplied vector is used to specify when the Delta Parameter is updated If the Flag Vector is set to 1 2 inf then the Delta Parameter is updated every other time that the Gooey Delta is activated The Flagged calculation option is useful for things like scanning moving windows and toggli
151. er s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences A Question for You Overwrite Existing Project File 2 The second option is to instead choose to Open Existing Optiscan Project A completely different Project Manager window will show up Project Manager History Browse Project History List amin green mat PROJECT INFO Project Folder FAoscan projstymin_green Hones Project File tymin_green mat Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 15 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences This Project Manager has a few neat features First it will show the last project file that was saved in the form of project_name mat If this is the project desired to be open click OK and OptiScan will load it up If another previously saved project is desired click on the upper tab section labeled Browse The correct directory can be found and the corresponding project Likely the project mat file will be located in a folder of the same name While browsing at the bottom of this window is a little section that displays all project files that are stored in the selected folder and allows quick access to choose the desired folder Likely only one project file will be stored in the folder though Tips on saving projects Even though you can name a brand new project what you want from startup the best way is to just open a the generic myproject mat and when it s time to save
152. erforming calculations rcwt_fname Filename of the mat file that contains the grating structure incident_flag Flag that specifies whether or not the index of refraction for the incident medium is described by a dispersion file A value of 1 specifies the use of a dispersion file and a value of O specifies the use of a fixed index substrate_flag Flag that specifies whether or not the index of refraction for the substrate is described by a dispersion file A value of 1 specifies the use of a dispersion file and a value of O specifies the use of a fixed index Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 288 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences inc_filename Dispersion filename that is associated with the incident medium sub_filename Dispersion filename that is associated with the substrate inc_dispers_file Full path and filename that is associated with the incident medium sub_dispers_file Full path and filename that is associated with the substrate See Also MOP Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 289 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Thin Film Calculator Description Allows user to make Fresnel reflection and transmission plots of thin film stacks Plots both the s and p polarization curves and the phases It can also plot either the amplitude or the intensity It can take a very large stack of different lay
153. ers Click thickness Go to SCALER OPTIONS Type the 2e 6 in the STEP VALUE And type 10 in the modulo count Click ok Click the second del This del object scans radially Type the 0 5e 6 in the STEP VALUE which moves 0 5um radially And type the inf in the modulo count Type the flag vector 1 10 inf In the calculation options Then it updates every 10 layers Then click ok Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 123 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Then click 1 RESTORE OBJECT Then in the menu type the same name as saved file name which is incident_spotl mat Then click the add link to chain And click the chain the this order 1t del to pro object 24 del to mlf object 31d 1 St restore object to pro object 4th pro object to mlf 5th mlf to save field object In the main widow you see CALC Then type 20 in the CHAIN COUNT Which means you calculate 10 layers calculation at O of window center And calculate 10 layers after scan at radial 0 5um After simulation done Then the top menu in the window click CLEAR CHAIN Part III Image the fluorescence from each layer with the pickup lens Main task save each geometrical image and PSFs out of readout lens pick up lens If you make the name of saved file as plane 1001 mat then program calculates and saves PSFs and geometrical images of the mark For example The
154. ers with no limit Getting Started Notes Parameters Buttons Example Command Line Vaiables See Also Getting Started The Thin Film Calculator is accessed through the Accessories menu under the name TFT Calculator or from the Custom Pattern Panel Notes the opening screen is always set to the commonly used values on the layer manager screen click OK to save the layers used an error message appears if there are no layers in the manager the layer manager in this calculator works the same way as the thin film target layer manager Parameters Index of Incident Medium this is the index of the starting location Index of Substrate this is the last index in the stack Wavelength wavelength of the light in meters From angle__to__ the chosen range of angles to make the plots in degrees Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 290 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Buttons Plot the amplitude press this button to just graph the amplitude of reflection or transmission Plot the intensity press this to plot the intensity instead amplitude squared Save Plot Values check this box to save the actual numbers used to make the plot They are saved as a mat file that can be opened in the Matlab workspace window Reflection Plot Chooses to plot the reflection curves Transmission Plot Chooses to plot the transmission curves Change Layers Opens the layer manager window Exa
155. es Editor File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help Views ColorMaps Max Target Files Ex MMe tesk rat Target Mask Menu terns Replace A Fiece ka hain 0 01 O Make a larger defect with varying depth Now another piece with a larger area more depth and a Gaussian shape will be added 1 Choose to REPLACE A PIECE 2 Now choose CREATE CUSTOM PATTERN 3 Select SuperGaus Rnd We want a defect of about 2 mm in diameter so put in 2e 3 into the FWHM X box es 2e 3 Click NEXT gt 4 Now the defect needs to be placed The window should be a bit larger than the diameter specified for the defect so a 5 mm box should be sufficient The placement will be with the X CENTER at 2 mm and the Y CENTER at 5 mm Set all values as seen below Magnitude Min O Wiax 12 006 0 01 p Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 338 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences l Figure No 3 M2 Test Mirror Properties Editor File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help Window Size Width 005 Length 005 Window Center Center ea Y Center Ae O04 Find in Full in 0 01 Besl Eea 001 0 005 0 Help Cancel Prey Mest z 5 The max depth will be more than the previous defect For a defect of 100 nm set MAX to 100e 9 Keep MIN at 0 and SCALE DATA and AMPLITUDE selected 6 Save it with the same name and FINISH Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 339 OptiScan
156. es and specifications that assigned to an object in Optiscan are being saved to a file These files can either be updated or a new file may be created Save Filename Panel Fields Panel Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 303 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Save Filename Panel Purpose The Save Filename Panel allows the user to specify the filename which optiscan should use when it stores the associated data to disk In most cases the directory folder is a constant and it cannot be changed This is because optiscan uses specially named folders to store its data in As an example optiscan stores targets in the current project s targets directory Screen Shot Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 304 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences t Specify Output File S FEEF eee ores ee ee oe et aa aaa e Babble sar ee ee BE ell fa OE mais Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 305 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Fields Panel Description The Fields Panel allows the user to select the fields which should be saved and restored The field matrices which are saved restored to a file are Matrix Name Description Ext Transmitted X field Eyt Transmitted Y field Ezt Transmitted Z fi
157. et STANDARD Parameters Set Thickness 0 Click Ese to switch to surface 5 14 Since surface 4 is the last surface needed in this system surface 5 may be deleted Click Del Dal to remove surface 5 Be sure that surfaces 1 2 and 4 are set to PY STANDARD Parameters o Click OK 15 The following lens should now be shown in the LENS PROPERTIES EDITOR Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 405 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences rues Editor art To understand what the lens viewer is displaying take a look at the following figure Note that this is an old figure with mm units on the axes Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 406 lt Figure No 3 Lens Properties Editor OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences 10 x Fle gdt pew Insert Took Window Hels View Ars Y axe 10 10 20 gt 200 A0 100 A 0 S0 00 160 20 Each of the arrows specifies the span of a surface s The distance from the object to the lens s2 The stop location and size 3 The distance from the lens to surface 4 Surface 3 also determines the focal length of this lens s4 The position of the observation plane In this case the observation plane coincides with the end of surface 3 16 Click OK to go back to the workspace 17 Arrange the OPTICS and SOURCE icons such that they are situated close
158. ext You will then see the following panel Choose Grating f Rectangular Fourier Seres Direct Input C Fourier Seres Catalog C Fourier Seres Trapezoid Choosing a Grating Rectangular Rectangular grating specified by slit width period center shift and angle Fourier Series Direct Input Grating is created by a Fourier transform using sine and cosine functions for the basis functions Up to 10 coefficients for cosine and 10 for sine can be input Fourier Series Catalog Grating is created by a fourier transform using coefficients that have already been figured out for you Fourier Series Trapezoidal Trapezoidal grating specified by base width period angle and number of coefficients Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 199 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences One Dimensional Grating Rectangular Description Creates a one dimensional grating pattern Getting Started Slit Width Period Center Shift Angle Finishing the Wizard See Also Getting Started Right click on the object in which a one dimensional grating is desired The object can be a target source detector or any object using the 2D viewer Click edit to bring up the properties editor Choose Replace A Piece from Menu Items and click go When the Replace A Piece wizard comes up choose One Dimensional Grating and click next When the next panel comes up choose
159. f Arizona College of Optical Sciences J Figure No 4 Profile Plot E _ B x File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help DO RMS KAAS PED x10 Aerial Irradiance rma Profile Plat Aerial Iradiance wiz Value 1 5 1 05 D 0 5 i 15 Position MES units eine See Also Tutorials Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 424 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Convert a Coherent Source to an Incoherent source In the SOURCE PROPERTIES EDITOR set the following options on the SOURCE TYPE tab Figure No 3 Source Properties Editor KB File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help Dimensions Source Type About Choose Source Type Coherent N Source Points 125 W Show Plat Incoherent a Ee Base Index 1 1000 Eamel Sampling Stile Fulficdric ol e eo Sources LAMBDA Wave Length cann Update Simulators LAME DA with This One Sources Integrated Power Coherent Source 0 nly Power m aun M Use Power Normalization in Calculations It is not required that SHOW PLOT is checked If this option is selected a 2 D view of the source with the sampled points is shown when the user runs a simulation The following is what the source plot looks like Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 425 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Figure No 3 E a2 Palel es File Edit view
160. f the chosen period is too close to the sampling of the object results may be unpredictable If you experience problems with this increase your sampling by decreasing the Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 213 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences distance between the samples X Sampling and Y Sampling in the properties of the object However decreasing these values too much can cause your computer to slow down considerably and even freeze when you try to add multiply or replace a piece Angle Angle in degrees of the sides of the trapezoid Number of Coefficients Number of Coefficients to use in the Fourier Transform Using more coefficients will result in a smoother pattern but will slow down the process of adding replacing or multiplying a piece Finishing the Wizard Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 214 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences The Piece Size window is where the size and location of the grating 1s specified The grating will be re interpolated based on the sampling of the mask it is being placed into If the Full Window Button is clicked then the grating will replace the old mask entirely B 10 Magnitude Min O Max 0 Window Size Width 0666 005 Length 025 005 Window Center Meente 0 5e 005 Y ECerter Find Win Full in Scaling The Grating The scaling
161. f the manual but if you are like me you probably won t access the Help button until after your first blunder or two I strongly suggest that you now go through several tutorials and then play around with the sample projects before building your own project In any case I hope you enjoy the program On a final note please understand that OptiScan is a Work in Progress and it is being made available at a very reasonable fee The primary purpose for the program is research License fees are used to support further development of the program and student education We welcome your comments and suggestions and bugs will be promptly displayed on the OptiScan web site Licensed users will receive updated code as it becomes available Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 12 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Startup Panel Description The Startup Panel allows the user to choose whether he she wants to open an existing Optiscan Project or create a new Optiscan Project When a new Optiscan Project is created a new folder directory is created to put it in The Optiscan Project File typically has the same name as the folder that it is stored in This file is commonly called the Optiscan Project since it 1s the file that 1s opened when the Open Existing Optiscan Project option is chosen A Figure No 1 E mea Welcome To Optiscan Hew Or Existing Open Existing Optiscan Project
162. for detector The default is the userdata folder of the current project fib _result_file The name of the Ist data file The default is fib1dat dat Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 61 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Notes There is a slight bug that occurs when changing the mode pattern of the detector The Y axis is reversed in the viewer that is used to select the window size and position for the new pattern element This will cause an element positioned in the upper half of the screen in the edit window to actually appear in the lower half of the screen when the mode pattern is actually updated References 1 K Garcia Calculating Component Coupling Coefficients Laser Focus World August 2000 Retrieved June 10 2003 lt http www breault com ftp docs coupling pdf gt A copy of this article is also available here 2 D Marcuse Loss Analysis of Single Mode Fiber Splices The Bell System Technical Journal Vol 56 No 5 May June 1977 A copy of this article is also available here See Also 2d viewer Link Parameters Panel Optical Fiber Calculator Command Line Functions Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 62 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Source Type Panel Description The Source Type Panel allows the user to select the desired source type and specify the source s value for LAMBD
163. g 7 8125e 005 Help Cancel UE 4 Set all the numbers as they are shown above 5 Click OK Creating the Source Distribution 1 The source should be Gaussian so first choose REPLACE A PIECE from the MENU ITEMS box 2 Now the ADD A PIECE wizard is opened The first step is to choose a pattern Since a Gaussian is to be created the pattern will be customized Select CREATE CUSTOM PATTERN and click NEXT gt Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 326 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Figure No 4 Source Properties Editor Sel File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help Choose a pattern Input Input from file i Choose trom catalog patterns One Dimensional Grating Pyramid Function Linear Ramp 3 On the next screen select SuperGaus Rnd Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 327 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences 2 Figure Mo 4 Source Properties Editor Sel File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help E Hermite C Misdnd Match Pattern Parameters MES PHM 2 1 005 LargeN urn J Laser Diode Calculator Optical Fiber Calculator Gaussian Beam width Calculator Help Cancel Prey Mest z The dimensions for the source right now are at 20 cm To get a good Gaussian source to fit within the window a FWHM of 20 cm should produce a good source Input 20e 3 in the box to the right of FWHM X Click
164. g the Offsets Enter the offsets in the Offsets portion of the Dimensions Panel Offsets SCOffset y Ottset X Offset The MKS location of the left edge of the object Y Offset The MKS location of the right edge of the object Specifying the Sampling Enter the sampling in the Sampling portion of the Dimensions Panel Sampling Sampling e008 Sampling Te 008 X Sampling The MKS sampling of columns Y Sampling The MKS sampling of the rows Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 219 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences The Coordinate Vectors xvec xoffset xsampling xoffset length yvec yoffset width 2 ysampling yoffset width 2 See Also Window Dimensions 2D Viewer Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 220 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Chapter 4 Setting Simulation Parameters Setting Simulation Parameters When all objects have been laid out on the workspace and linked together the system can be simulated By pressing the Calc button in the lower right hand corner a set of parameters is displayed to run the simulation The Model Panel O Sampling O Setup Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 221 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Model Sampling Panel Description The Model Sampling Panel lets the user set
165. ght 2005 University of Arizona 486 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences GS_beam_shaper Purpose This project calculates an x z z is the depth dimension profile of the focus spot distribution based on diffraction Features demonstrated Use of source object to illuminate the entrance pupil of a simple lens that takes collimated light to a focus Use of the script delta object to change focus Use of multiply piece to change the phase distribution of a source matix Use of a gooey delta object to change focus Use of MOP script object to obtain the slice information and process it on each cycle Use of simdata for storing temporary data during a calculation Use of ChainCount and ChainIndex for testing the calculation cycle Use of the About panel on an object to limit its calculation frequency to make source set sampling in properties panel to 500x500 in the diameter of the entrance pupil Select replace a piece using the uniform circle catalog pattern generate random matrix uniformly distributed over 0 1 in the command line and save to file in the source folder random mat Zep rand 9007500 save random_mat random_mat select muliply piece and Input from file the input file is random_mat and the input matrix in that file has the same name select full window on the next panel the next panel will look like this because we want to multiply the random matrix to the p
166. gt Then you go to next surface when you click each time Go to the surface 4 OF 6 Beam is focused at the 20mm after that surface by setting RADIUS and THICKNESS to 20 Then you can see the Go to the surface 5 OF 6 Then you can see the thickness is equal to 0 01 which tells we have offset 10um back from focused positions And INDEX is 1 5 then click ok Again click ok On the main window you will see the save field object next to lens Then Click the save field object In FILE in the use field file type the name you want to have In this example we have incident_spot1 mat Then click ok Then click the add link to chain And click the chain this order however you have to click yellow color of chain Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 122 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences From source to lens and lens to save field object In the main window you see CALC Click it then type 1 in the CHAIN COUNT Then click ok Then in the top menu you will see CLEAR CHAIN and click it In the top menu click the edit object Then click 1 RESTORE OBJECT Then in the menu type the same name as saved file name which is incident_spot mat Then click ok Part II Interact the illumination beam with the data layers with the fluorescent object In the top menu click the edit object Then click mlf object which is for fluorescent object Let s bring
167. hase argument of the uniform circle The max is set to 2 pi in order to get the full dynamic range of the phase Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 487 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences s EE mo 3 Source Properties Editor Fle Edt lew Insert Tools window Help Scaling qe Scale Data n C Ampitude pr s a ie Ph ase Phase Option onk works when muhioiing Do NetRescale Dals 4 piece Sealing useage Bilmaps 1 The bimap values are irst scaled between O bisck and 1 fhe Black thiough orev bo white iz the most steechthonwand way to do lhe scaling However AGE values can be used in an me sense That is map ahos sqtied 2 green 2 beak 2 The Q4o 1 scaled map is then assigned values on alinear scale vath Devalue pixels assigned the value of Min and wake pixels assigned the value of Max mat tiles 1 The values are scaled according to the folleeving formula output data input dataifM ax Min hii custom pattems 1 1lFno rescabteg is desned select Uo Mot Re ecale J Help Cancel E PTA i Net EEE PEE EE R dick ek ek i ik tk ee When finished view phase in the display window in order to see the phase distribution How it works The simple lens used in this project is a single surface paraxial lens The lens is illuminated at its entrance pupil by a perfectly uniform laser beam Calculation of the focus spot is determined from scalar d
168. hat object should be calculated First Chain Calculation Specifies that the the associated object s calculation procedure should only be called during the first chain calculation Based On Flag Vector Specifies that the the associated object s calculation procedure should be called based on the Flag Vector Based On Flag Vector Flag Vector T250 es Given this Flag Vector the Optiscan Simulation Engine would be able to call the associated object s calculation procedure during the first third fifth chain calculations Last Chain Calculation Specifies that the the associated object s calculation procedure should only be called during the last chain calculation Based On Input Link Specifies that the object s calculation procedure should be called based on the calculation setting of the previous link If a link uses this setting the Optiscan Simulation Engine will present the user with an Error Dialog Message Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 41 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Optiscan Cheat Sheet Beam Splitter splits electric fields into a transmitted part and a reflected part see Beam Splitter Settings Delta Object allows the user to modify the parameters of their model components during simulation see Modifying Parameters Easily Script Tool Advanced Detector allows the user to specify an arbitrary detector using a 256 color BMP det
169. he legnth of the mlf target offx The offset of the mlf target from the optical axis in the x direction offy The offset of the mlf target from the optical axis in the y direction offz The offset of the mlf target from the optical axis in the z direction xsample The sample spacing in the x direction ysample The sample spacing in the y direction n incident The index of refraction of the incident medium n_sub The index of refraction of the substrate window_width_x The width of the window that scans over the mlf target window_length_y The legnth of the window that scans over the mlf target window_xcenter The x coordinate of the scan window s center window_ycenter The y coordinate of the scan window s center layerlist_fname The name of the layerlist file The default name is mlflist mat n_reference The index of refraction for the layer See Also ink Parameters Panel Command Line Functions Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 127 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Polarization Settings Description The Polarization Settings Panel is used to specify the parameters used in the polarization calculation Polarization Parameters Polarizer Parameters ees e rotation rT rotation around z axis e_phase E phase of x axis at rotation 0 o_phase ao phase of y axis at rotation 0 Comma
170. ians 0 Tilt Z radians E OOOtOC S Decenter rm Las Decenter T im Glass File MODEL Extra Data Matrix Element A Add BROWSE Gls lt f gt ae Moos Boe ES ee Click gt to switch to surface 2 Surface 2 is designated as the stop surface of this system This means that the diameter of surface 2 needs to match up with the stop diameter Set the DIAMETER of this surface to 25e 3 Also this surface should have a thickness of 0 a RADIUS of Inf and an INDEX of 1 Click Es to switch to surface 3 Surface 3 describes the 15t curved surface of the lens Set the parameters for this system as shown in the figure below Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 385 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Figure No 3 Lens Properties Editor File Edit wiew Insert Tools Window Help Lens Settings Lens Editor 7 Parameters for urface 3 of 5 kd STANDARD Parameters Radius m a443 Thickness m 75e3 Index H5 ooo Conic C Diameter m ed Tits adian 0 Tit radians 0 TitZfradans o Decenter m e ooo Decenter Y rri i Unused l Llaneed ee a Unused Unused Auzen I er i orm r 1 f Unused Unused ene BPLSEH Huse it HL Hed lence Oy Se CHISEL paa Hpmgseg Unused heed Unused Extra Data Matrix Element Add BROWSE Glass EE Dell Ada Del 53 Help
171. ibed here Getting Started Surface Specific Panel Delta Variable Calculation Options Getting Started Start by building a Gooey Delta Object and linking it to the lens you want to modify link to chain Optics MA Targets i ulate chain Detectors O EEE i r chain Source Propagate Polarization Element Beam splitter Script Delta save fields Restore fields Mathematical operation Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 166 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences 4 Figure No 2 OPTISCAN 1 01 myproject mat System Buld Accessones Help Arrange Object Make link i Add link to chain i Edit Object i Edit link i Clear chain Delete Object Delete link Ee oe ee eee Gooey Delta objects are used by clicking Edit Object and then clicking on the Gooey Delta If the Gooey Delta is associated with more than one object such as the configuration below Se ee a a then a dialog box similar to x Select an Object Ok Cancel will be displayed after the Gooey Delta is clicked on choose the desired object from the selection list then click OK to display the Gooey Delta Panel shown below Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 167 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Figure No 3 Delta Properties Editor a bs oj x File Edt Tools Window Help Variable Tool A
172. ical Sciences A Figure No 3 Source Properties Editor File Edit wiew Insert Tools Window Help Views ColorMaps Magnitude Min U hax 1 a Wax Source File sre2x mat Source Mask x Source Menu ken Add Piece a Yalue 0 OONE4 Y 0 001121 Help Close 22 Click CLOSE 23 Drag the SOURCE icon into the middle of the workspace Step 2 Propagating This step instructs the user on how to propagate light a desired distance through free space 1 From the BUILD menu select PROPAGATE The 8 icon should appear in the upper right hand corner of the schematic window 2 RIGHT click the PROPAGATE icon and select EDIT 3 Select Do not scale or pad the input under AUTOSCALE INPUT OPTIONS which will keep the sampling at 512x512 4 Select Do not modify the output under SPECIFY OUTPUT RANGE AND SCALING which will not modify the coordinate axes Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 458 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences 5 The TOTAL PROPAGATION DISTANCE is the distance from the source that the light travels after passing through this particular propagation icon In this example it is desired that the light travel 316 1 mm from the source where N 5 In the TOTAL PROPAGATION DISTANCE dialogue boxes enter 0 3161 Click OK 6 Move the propagate and source icons such that they are situated close to each other similar to the followi
173. ical element Gradient index Grin lens surface Interface with Remcoms XFDTD Summary In summary Optiscan is a flexible easy to use program that was built on previous codes and is constantly expanding Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 34 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Chapter 1 Objects Objects Objects are the basic functions of Optiscan They are optical elements that Optiscan is capable of using They appear as small icons on the workspace and can be linked together to form an optical system The cheat sheet displays all the objects available to Optiscan About Panel Cheat Sheet Detector O Multiple Detector Example O Multiple Detector Layers Fiber Detector Source Object O Source Type Panel Beam Splitter Object O Beam Splitter Settings Panel Lens Object Lens Editor Panel Lens Properties Panel Lens Sampling Panel Lens Setup Panel Propagation Options Panel Lens View Editor Lens Viewer Settings Aberrations Panel Illuminator Lens Panel Link Parameters Panel Using Tilts e TILTX TILTY e TILTZ Targets O Target Window O Multiple Layers The Layer Manager Panel Multilayer File Format O10 Ov O O O O O00 Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 35 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences O Reflective Target Transmission Target Thin film Target TFT Settings Panel TFT Layer Ma
174. icates that it is the first link in the chain calculation and it works on the transmitted fields from the source The second link is assigned T 2 so the save object will take the transmitted fields calculated from the lens and save them in a file The mechanics of building the objects assigning links and specifying the order of calculation in the chain are provided in this user s manual In addition properties of an object can be edited by selecting the object with the mouse button and then selecting the edit option A new window opens that contains information that can be modified Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 9 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Many analysis problems require that some aspect of the system must be modified between calculations In OptiScan one powerful way to adjust an object s parameters is with the gooey delta object For example if the user desires analysis of the electric field distribution in the target plane as a function of the distance from the last surface of the lens a gooey delta object can be linked to the lens as shown below o i e m a o m m o e o oe oom If the gooey delta object is the first link in the chain it will change the appropriate surface thickness before the source lens save calculation takes place Multiple source lens save calculations can be implemented automatically by setting the Chain Count variable to a val
175. ield Operation since the Delta object will modify the target s window parameters Step 4 The links should look like the ones on the right Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 351 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Modify The Link Attributes of the Delta Target Link Step 1 Click on the Link between the Delta and Target The Link Properties editor should be displayed See Link Properties Step 2 Change the Link Type to Object Field Operation A link from a Delta to another object is always pointed at the other object The link type is typically set to Object Field Operation so that the simulator knows that it only has to update the parameters of the object This tells the simulator to only evaluate the Delta object but not the Target Object This may sound confusing but without this type of link the Target would be evaluated twice Once for the Source Target link and a second time for the Delta Target link Configure the Delta Object Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 352 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Click on the Edit object radio button in the Project Window Click on the Delta Object Select X Win Center from the dialog box that appears and then click OK Configure the X Win Center parameters as shown on the left Acce
176. iffraction theory In order to change focus the z distance from the lens to the target plane is modified for each cycle of Chain Count Each cycle of Chain Count calculates the spot distribution on a plane perpendicular to the depth dimension The FFT array size is 512x512 for this calculation as set in the Preferences Sampling panel under System in the main project window The MOP takes the complex amplitude information of the spot distribution and finds a profile vector in the x dimension The information is accumulated in a matrix Eslice that contains the focus profile On the first chain calculation simdata ChainIndex 1 the matrix is initialized On successive cycles the cycle number is used to index the slice location in the matrix On the last cycle simdata ChainIndex simdata ChainCount the matrix is loaded into the output x field transmission array simdata Ext Also the reference x and y vectors simdata sysxvec and simdata sysyvec respectively are assigned Notice that the x dimension is along the transverse plane and the depth dimension z is now Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 488 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences assigned to y in the output The save object activates only on the last cycle as set by the About panel in its edit window The easiest way to change the focus point is to use the gooey delta object A surface specific thickness variable is
177. ight 2005 University of Arizona 311 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Chapter 9 User Defined Operations User Defined Operations Optiscan has the capabilities to use custom mathematical calculations in the optical simulations These are most often created as m files and created by the user wishing to implement their own equations Custom Mathematical Operations MOP s Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 312 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Custom Mathematical Operations Description Allows the user to augment the functionality of OPTISCAN through use of custom mathematical electric field calculations Overview In order to use a Custom Mathematical Operation object you need to create an m file which uses the following function declaration formation function mop curlink simdata errmsg function_name action mop curlink simdata if the function call is successful then the function should set the output variable as follows errmsg if the function call is not successful and therefore the simulation should be stopped then errmsg should be set equal to a description of the error that occured errmsg The Input Field Cannot be Zero Sometimes it is important for the mathematical operation to know what kind of input link is connected to it This can be done by querying curlink for its linktyp
178. imum of the spot in meters for a decaying exponential shape Y Spot FW 1 e 2 Y direction Full Width 1 e 2 of the spot in meters for a decaying exponential shape Example Please click here for an example of how to use the laser diode calculator See Also Custom Pattern Panel Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 265 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Laser Diode Example See Also 1 First generate a laser source in a project as shown in Fig 1 CAN 1 01 myproject mat ols System Build Accessories Help Fig 1 generate a source 2 Edit the source and choose the Replace a Piece option in the Menu Items pull down menu then click Go Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 266 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Figure No 3 Source Properties Editor O x File Edit Jools Window Help Views ColoMaps difaqnitude Nin 0 779165 Max 0 999975 a Max ounce File arr w mat 2 Source Mask 32 Soye Meru terns 0 Replace OPiese Goa H 5 Al july 4 hin 7 of 7 0 2 R i 10 0 Value 0857 2 045e 0Lb oy 2 6559e 006 Help Ree 3 In the Source Properties Editor choose Create custom pattern In order to simulate a laser beam users can generate a custom pattern from this option Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 267 OptiScan 6 2 0 Use
179. in the simulation Step3 You can watch the system as it is calculated The purple box denotes that the reflective target is begin calculated The purple arrow points to the next object Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 360 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Step 4 View the plots Reflection of Target No Shift Reflection of Target 0 6 micron shift 107 Magnitude Min 0 Max 0 45893 1407 Magnitude Min 0 Max 0 45893 a B A G 4 4 2 2 0 0 2 3 a d He G 4 4 10 10 x10 Reflection of Target 1 2 micron shift Reflection of Target 1 8 micron shift y 10 Magnitude Min 0 Max 0 45893 y 10 Magnitude Mlin 0 Max 0 45693 6 6 4 4 aa 2 0 0 A Bp a if 35 6 ae A 10 40 Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 361 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Scanning Spot Tutorial Slide l Slide2 Slide3 Slide4 Slide5 Slide6 Slide7 Slides Slide9 Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 362 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Scanning Spot Tutorial Slide 1 gt C OPTICAL DATA STORAGE CENTER Modelling a scanning spot system for optical data storage using Optiscan Optical Disk et Focused scanning spot Objective lens Entrance and exit pupil Detector Collimated beam from Milster Re
180. ions Coupling Efficiency Wr WR O We O 4 2 44 E ur x m y yr z represent the optical fields incident upon the fiber w oo Te I o o thoy fw t th l iugates of th ti tical Ws a xc WN f We ap represen e comp ex conjuga es oO e propaga Ing Op 1Ca field modes inside the fiber Gaussian Beamwidth of a Single Mode Fiber from Reference 2 3 w a 0 6541 619 v2 2 879 v7 amp represents the 1 e radius of the propagating Gaussian fiber mode E e a 2 4 where a is the radius of the fiber core and k is the P Mja a E a wave number r ir where Aa is the propagating wavelength in air m Command Line Variables width_x The x dimension of the detector in meters length_y The y dimension of the detector in meters offx The offset from the optical axis in the x direction in meters offy The offset from the optical axis in the y direction in meters xsample The sample spacing in the x direction ysample The sample spacing in the y direction fib_x_file Name of the file that contains the x polarized responsivity of the detector By default it is fib1x mat fib_y_file Name of the file that contains the y polarized responsivity of the detector By default itis fibly mat fib_z_file Name of the file that contains the z polarized responsivity of the detector By default itis fib1z mat fib_result_folder The location of the output data folder
181. it is constantly being rewritten and added to and reloaded to use again Known Bug when closing viewer windows the following error sometimes appears This error is harmless and can be ignored 2 Error using gt set Invalid object handle Error in gt C MATLAB6p5 toolbox matlab graph3d colorbar m On line 208 gt set gcf currentaxes GCA 2 Error using gt delete Error while evaluating text DeleteFcn Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 492 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Index Aberrations Panel The About Panel The Add A Piece Wizard Angular Spectrum Propagation Auxiliary Command Line Functions O pupil fir sur field seidel rayfan wavetan spot diagram find chiefray intercepts O O O O OOOO Basic Viewer GS Beam Shaper sample project Beam Splitter Settings Panel Bitmap Scaling Panel Catalog Pattern Panel Cheat Sheet Choice Delta Variables Coherent and Incoherent Point Source Imaging Tutorial Command Line Functions Creating a Thick Lens Tutorial Custom Gooey Variable Configuration Panel Custom Mathematical Operations MOP s Custom Pattern Example Custom Pattern Generator Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 493 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Delta Function M files Detector Dimensions Panel Dimensions Tab Parameters Fiber Detector Fields
182. itial value is 5e 7 then during the simulation the variable would have uniformly distributed random values between 4e 7 and 6e 7 Using a Minimum and Maximum scaler Uptions iiia alle Befiny Use Objects Initial Value Hiini 76 007 atep Type konte Cardo Uniform Maxinum Bel In this illustration the Minimum is set to 3e 7 and the Maximum is set to 5e 7 so during the simulation the variable will have uniformly distributed random values between 3e 7 and 5e 7 Monte Carlo Gaussian Random values with a gaussian curve for a histogram Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 154 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences 20 Using the Object s Initial Value for the Mean Scaler Options He sear Sigma Vector Monte Carlo Uniform In this illustration sigma is set to le 7 so if the object s initial value is 5e 7 then during the simulation the variable will have Gaussian curve distributed random values with a mean of 5e 7 and a standard deviation of le 7 Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 155 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Specifying a Mean scaler Options Mean pe 007 J Use Objects Initial Value Sigma Te 007 epee Monte Calo Gaussian Y In this illustration sigma is set to le 7 and the mean is set to 6e 7 so during the simulation the variable will have Gaussian curve distributed random val
183. ity of Reflected P component 0 0 400 0 100 100 0 Tog Incident Angle degrees Incident Angle degrees Phase of Reflected S camponent Phase of Reflected P component z200 200 100 100 0 E 100 100 200 200 4 100 400 U 100 Incident Angle degrees Incident Angle degrees Fig 8 12 With both figure windows open it easy to see the difference between viewing simply the amplitude or the intensity amplitude squared Feel free to mess around with the different parameters 13 If your interest is to find certain values on the graphs you can zoom in on a particular graph by using the left mouse button Use the right mouse button to zoom out Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 299 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences sJ Figure No 4 File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help oO x Demakan PE2 Intensity of Reflected S component 0 100 0 Incident Angle degrees Phase of Reflected S component 200 100 Incident Angle degrees Intensity of Reflected P component 0 25 0 2 0 15 a0 40 s 60 Incident Angle degrees Phase of Reflected P component 200 200 4 400 0 Incident Angle degrees 100 Fig 9 A snapshot with the upper right graph zoomed in 14 One last thing to mention 1f the change layers menu contains no layers as shown in figure 10 Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 300 OptiScan 6 2 0
184. iversity of Arizona 368 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Scanning Spot Tutorial Slide 7 a the disk pucs al vd the Ic ok c ok m 5 E ihe Gale b f xi s The i The user will notice 1 The look object output will be a focused gaussian spot Right mouse click on the focused spot 1 The out put will be an A and Y profile of the focused spot Focused spot Focused spot O X and Y profile Milster Research Group Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 369 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Scanning Spot Tutorial Slide 8 gt ICAL DATA STORAGE CENTER Grating like object to scan he sca object is a reflective tar get that can be us for ar optics cal ons In this pa anr war meae ho marks repres nting dat a bits h ee lectivity of unity ona 3 een nd with reflectivity o 2 Right mouse click on fecal siete ae The user will notice 1 The object area is 6x6um with the object centered on j Cross track 0 in both the along track and cross track directions 2 The individual bit sizes are 0 9umx0 fum inthe along track and cross track directions respectively 3 There is a green window in the target space This window defines the spot target interaction area and it should typically be twice the diameter of AANA Where A Is Along track the light wavelength and NA is the
185. izona 172 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences RSS Analysis Description Root sum square RSS analysis is used to check the worst case performance of a system based on tolerance limits In Optiscan the user defines RSS variables through the Delta function object Tolerance limits for the variable are inserted manually An auto range option is under development Each cycle of the chain calculation uses one of the variables at its tolerance limit The user calculates a performance metric like rms wavefront or diffraction spot size and saves the result After all variables are evaluated the user can determine which is the most sensitive Getting Started The first step is to build a Gooey Delta object and link it to all the objects you want to include in the RSS Analysis See Gooey Delta Panel and Scalar Delta Variablesfor more information on how to set them up When you set up the variables click the RSS check box in the lower left hand corner and the RSS panel will be displayed You can either input the minimum and maximum for each variable yourself or you can use the auto range calculator by clicking on the auto range check box and entering a tolerance and a script So far the only predefined script is the highly experimental rms wavefront error script that only works for lens thickness variables and does not implement compensation Once you have your GUI delta variables
186. ks have Calculation Options associated with them Hence the Gooey Delta may not be calculated on the last chain calculation if the link s Calculation Options don t permit the Gooey Delta to be calculated on the last calculation A user supplied vector is used to specify when the Delta Parameter is updated If the Flag Vector is set to 1 2 inf then the Delta Parameter is updated every other time that the Gooey Delta is activated The Flagged calculation option is useful for things like scanning moving windows and toggling options Custom MOP Delta Variables TFT and MO Layer Specific Delta Variables Lens Surface Specific Delta Variables Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 139 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Custom Variable Configuration Introduction The Gooey Delta Object can be used to create custom user variables that work with their custom MOP functions The advantage of using the Gooey Delta Object is that the custom MOP function itself doesn t have to be modified An example Optiscan system configuration is shown below The MOP function uses five custom variables width Width of Target custom scaler length Length of Target custom scaler num_samples Number of Sample Points custom scaler output_filename The name of the output filename custom string show_plot Should a plot of the result be shown custom choice The Gooey
187. l University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences User Notes When using the Save Project As option the old main mat file e g myproject mat sometimes gets copied to the new project directory along with the new one This is harmless but if it causes confusion simply delete the old project file The Save Project As process does not modify the original project directory or the original project file Deleting the copy of the original project file that is in the new directory will not harm the original project In Matlab 6 0 arranging objects clicking and dragging can create a trail across the workspace The simplest way to get rid of these trails is to minimize and restore the project workspace window When scanning across a target the scan window range should not exceed the target boundaries Saving data in MOP s Here is an example of how to save data in MOP s if you want to save the value of the variable named Ext to a file named spot mat in the userdata directory insert this code into your script fname fullfile mop lt project lt userdata gt spot save fname Ext when you want to load that variable from the file and use it again use this code fname fullfile mop lt project lt userdata gt spot load fname This method must be used to save values because a persistant variable will not work in a MOP By using the above method to save values it is effectively a persistant variable
188. l MO TFT or Lens objects you should make sure they use different files Building a Gooey Delta Displaying the Gooey Delta Panel Displaying the Variable Tool Delta Variable Debugging Delta Variable Calculation Options See Also Building a Gooey Delta A Gooey Delta object is constructed from the build menu Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 134 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences link to chain Optics Targets dilate chain Detectors O zi r chain SOuUrce Propagate Polarization Element Beam splitter Tools Script Delta save fields Restore fields Mathematical operation A typical configuration is shown below Figure No 2 OPTISCAN Main Program indow ersion 1 00 Eile Edt Window Help System Build F ig Arran ge Object i Add link to chain Edit Object i Edit link Calculate chain it Delete Object gt Delete link i Clear chain aso er Ss ee ewe ew www were ww ek ge Pe In this illustration a Gooey Delta object is used to modify the parameters of a source object Displaying the Gooey Delta Panel A Gooey Delta object is used by clicking Edit Object and then clicking on the Gooey Delta If the Gooey Delta is associated with more than one object such as the configuration Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 135 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences then a dia
189. l lengths and adjusts the increments between data units accordingly normal automatically adjusts the aspect ratio of the axes and the aspect ratio of the data units represented on the axes to fill the plot box off turns off all axis lines tick marks and labels on turns on all axis lines tick marks and labels Descriptions of axis settings were taken from the Matlab help documentation Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 83 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences See also Aberrations Panel Auxiliary Command Line Functions Lens Functions Lens Tilts Lens Editor Panel Lens Functions Lens Properties Panel Lens Sampling Panel Lens Setup Panel Lens Viewer Settings Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 84 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Lens Viewer Settings Purpose Allows the user to customize the Lens Viewer Settings such as the width of the plot Left and Right and the number of rays of light which are traced The Bounds Area Left 4 Specifies the plot s minimum and maximum horizontal Fasi cE range in LENSUNITS Miras a Specifies how many rays should be plotted to show how the light travels through the lens group See also Aberrations Panel Auxiliary Command Line Functions Lens Functions Lens Tilts Lens Editor Panel Lens Functions Lens Properties Panel Lens Sampling Pan
190. laser source is used to focus into the material on the center ofthe data layers whichis 1Uum from the top of l4 layer Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 477 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Multilayer Fluorescent Target Slide 4 a CAFTICAL DATA STORAGE CENTER OP TECAN Hep Fes tor coher stimagig 5 Part 2 Lens Sn Aa dae a Lm La alcp Hanas ere A Llys 4 Welveqa Tenet Baa SKBDG CARS itor 4 pad Ph He PAA be at Uon biam eT 1 Rene Ine 13 In the lers change towawelengthif iti ieide the material For example Beam i inside the maternal index of refraction 1 4 and the wavelength ofbeam in the airis USSun Then make the lens wavelencth O 650am00l 5 0 4 5m Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 478 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Multilayer Fluorescent Target Slide 5 a COrPTICAL DATA STORAGE CENTER M OPTIBCAN Heb Fes tr ibcobere stimagig 5 Fart II 1 Interact the wluminaton beam with the data layers with the FLUORES CEMT OBJECT The wavelength of the source is eet to the wane knigth inthe mieria Miike the step size arid thickness Inthe de ject unin Which mea beam propagate each Art steps tithe rre dia p Ary wabi i ok for the total awttep m the pro object Del b ct take over the propagate step ated hidre ss w ji As the a Ehren too Tae
191. ld distribution at a plane inside the thin film stack The plane is located at layer of interest and the depth dimension offset from the top of the layer is specified by zoffset This option must be used with an Optics Object the Optics Object must be set to a Vector electromagnetic calculation in the Propagation Panel Also the Propagation to Target 3 must be set to Stop at exit pupil If layer of interest is set to 0 the result is the reflect fields at the top surface of the stack inside the incident medium From arbitrary input field to field inside film Takes an arbitrary input field and calculates the total field distribution at a plane inside the thin film stack If layer of interest is set to 0 the result is the reflect fields at the top surface of the stack inside the incident medium The angular spectrum is calculated from a unit amplitude point source at a location inside the thin film layers The point is located at layer of interest and the depth dimension offset from the top of the layer is specified by zoffset Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 112 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences offset of film A quadratic phase factor is added to the incident field from an Optics Object such that the film stack is effectively shifted a distance z0 toward the exit pupil Automatically adds the appropriate quadratic phase to the exi
192. lder is where the simulation data 1s written to by objects such as the save fields object if the path is specified as Userdata Folder userdata lt userdata gt filename txt The special pathname component lt userdata gt is replaced with the full pathname of the current project s userdata folder Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 224 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Chapter 5 Viewing Objects Results Viewing Objects Results Optiscan uses a 2 dimensional viewer to view any object that has dimensions The viewer is also used to view any results from a simulation using the look object or a detector Basic Viewer The Zoom Control Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 225 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Optiscan 2D Viewer Description The Optiscan 2D Viewer is used as the main screen to edit object masks and to display the resulting fields during a simulation The Plot Area The Plot Area shows the mask which is selected in the Mask Selector 250 j200 160 400 Value 3 0 2055 Ae ee 4 ii 082 006 A 25932006 The title of the plot describes the type of processing that was applied to the raw data The following types of processing are available Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 226 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Processing Des
193. lets the user set the various sampling parameters that are associated with the Lens Lens Sampling Portion Lens Sampling Hpupil Npupil is the number of sampling points across the pupil diameter Npupil is used to set the sampling in the transform planes associated with the lens For example the sampling of an input Npupil field in the object plane is determined by LAMBDA Npupil NA NHighNA where NA is the NA of the object space and NHighNaA is the base 2 number that describes the size of the transform field NHighNA is specified in the system preferences and is usually a number like 256 or 512 See also Aberrations Panel Auxiliary Command Line Functions Lens Functions Lens Tilts Lens Editor Panel Lens Functions Lens Properties Panel Lens Setup Panel Lens View Editor Lens Viewer Settings Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 75 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Lens Setup Panel Description The Lens Setup Panel lets you import an Optiscan Lens in a m file or convert a Zemax prescription file to an Optiscan Lens The Lens Setup Panel is found under the first tab Setup Propagation Abberation Illuminator Sampling About Specifying A Lens File The Lens File portion of the Lens Setup Panel allows the user to import a Zemax lens or copy an existing Optiscan Lens File m file Lene File Directory J OscanPro TestIn
194. ll update the value LAMBDA used in its calculations with the one specified If the Update Simulator s LAMBDA With This One check box 1s not checked then the Optiscan Simulation Engine will not update the value of LAMBDA Instead the simulator s current value for LAMBDA will be retained Command Line Variables width_x The x dimension of the source length_y The y dimension of the source offx The offset of the source in the x direction offy The offset of the source in the y direction offz The offset of the source in the z direction xsample The sample size in the x direction ysample The sample size in the y direction LAMBDA The wavelength of the source use_lambda Flag to use the source s lambda instead of the system lambda A value of 0 sets the source to use the system s wavelength and a value of 1 uses the source s wavelength src_type_flag Sets the source type to coherent or incoherent A value of 1 makes the source coherent and a value of 0 makes the source incoherent N_src_points Number of source points to be used with an incoherent source source_x_file File for the x polarized source info source_y_file File for the y polarized source info source_z_file File for the z polarized source info Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 65 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences See Also Dimensions 2d viewer Copyright 2005 Uni
195. llege of Optical Sciences Auxillary Command Line Functions Slide 15 find_chiefray_intercepts Displays the real chief ray intercepts at the last surface function XC YEI find chietray_intercerpts LEN Sstruct notes Touse this function simply type PACT YC find chietray intercepts fan optics module edit windows open Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 256 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Chapter 7 Supplemental Calculators Supplemental Calculators Optiscan has several programs that work separately from the workspace and objects They perform complex computations to give important calculations which become useful when setting up an optical system to simulate in the workspace Gaussian Beam Width Calculator Laser Diode Beam Calculator Optical Fiber Calculator RCWT Calculator Thin Film Calculator Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 257 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Gaussian Beam Width Calculator Description Getting Started How to use the Gaussian Beam Width Calculator The Meaning of Each Width See Also Getting Started 1 Click right button at source icon and select Edit 2 Select Replace A Piece in Menu Items and click Go 3 Choose Create custom pattern and click Next 4 Then the following window is shown Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 258
196. log box similar to Select an Abject Reflective Target Ok Cancel will be displayed after the Gooey Delta is clicked on Choose the desired object from the selection list then click on OK to display the Gooey Delta Panel Displaying the Variable Tool The Variable Tool is used to specify how the values of an Optiscan Object are modified during a simulation with creating a Scripted Delta Variable Tool About For example the Gooey Delta can modify the LAMBDA associated with a Source simply by clicking on the Add button Remie AoC Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 136 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences to see the available Delta Variables LAMBDA psource Points If LAMBDA 1s selected from this then it is placed in Delta Parameters list Delta Param eters LAMB E A The Delta Parameters List contains the variables which will be modified during a simulation The variables in this list are evaluated in the order which is shown A variable can be removed from the list by selecting the desired variable and then clicking on the Remove Button There are three types of Delta Parameters Scalar real complex and integer scalars String filenames and parameter vectors Choice achoice such as do this calculation or don t do this calculation Each type of Delta Parameter has a custom user interface More information about
197. lows an angle to be set which is the amount the mirror 1s rotated The rotation axis for the mirror starts vertical so a 90 degree rotation should put that axis horizontal which will allow an up and down tilt Once again make sure it is a FULL WINDOW Only a very small tilt is needed so a one micron change should suffice To add this tilt put 0 in MIN and le 6 in MAX Once again SCALE DATA and AMPLITUDE should Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 334 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences be selected Figure No 3 M1 Reference Mirror Properties Editor Sele File Edit wiew Insert Tools Window Help Scaling Scale Data Amplitude C Phase Phaze Option only works when multiolving C Boot Re scale Data a piece Scaling useage Bitmaps 1 The bitmap values are first scaled between 0 black and 1 white Black through gray to white is the mast straightforward way to do the scaling However AGE values can be used in anime sense That is map_value sqr red 2 green 2 blue 2 a he O to 1 scaled map is then assigned values on a linear scale with O value pixels assigned the value of Min and 1 value pels assigned the value of Maz mat files 1 The values are scaled accarding to the following formula output data input datat Mas Min Mini custom patterns 1 fro rescaling is desired select Lia Not Re scale Help C
198. ls Window Help Dna kans PAES eqn Spot Diagram Centered on Chief Ray ae E Euk T t 4 F 4 te A Pog 4 4 Y axis displacement rm u o E a j Eh Nis t H t 6 6 4A 3 0 2 6 8 X axis displacement m ead 22 Off axis aberrations may be seen as well To produce an off axis rayfan type rayfan 0 30e 3 at the command line This moves the object off axis by 30 mm in the y direction for the rayfan calculation The result is shown below Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 394 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences A Figure Mo 6 File Edit Oep Tools O HBkAASL PPR WIE Window Hel Insert I I I I I l I I I L I I I I I I I I I l I I I I I a I I I I I I 4 I I L I I I l I I I I I I I ieee en ee Se Pete ae Paste er a oe eee pane ee ae de ee al i tiie iii Lu puawasejdsig Eag ler whe t ia a aag das oA wet Ea wong ieee Ea sian a tent oe eee ao ee nig eae Oy le ee eee la een te eieetiee tetas ests iene ian qr i ee oe pbe Relative pupil coordinate From the rayfan it appears that there is astigmatism in the system as well as a small amount of coma See Also Tutorials Command Line Functions Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 395 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Op
199. lues are recalculated assuming that the near field spot fwhm is constant when you change any X value the other three X values are re calculated to match your input when you change any Y value the other three Y values are re calculated to match your input X direction is parallel to the junction Y direction is perpendicular to the junction Buttons New Laser Button Clears the edit boxes Save Laser Button Saves current values of the edit boxes Delete Laser Button Deletes the current laser as shown in the drop down menu Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 264 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Parameters Name name of the laser Wavelength wavelength of the laser in meters Astigmatism axial astigmatism of the laser in meters X FWHM Far Field X direction Full Width Half Maximum of the laser in degrees for a Gaussian distribution X FW 1 e 2 Far Field X direction Full Width 1 e 2 of the laser in degrees for a Gaussian distribution X Spot FWHM X direction Full Width Half Maximum of the spot in meters for a Gaussian distribution X Spot FW 1 e 2 X direction Full Width 1 e 2 of the spot in meters for a Gaussian distribution Y FWHM Far Field Y direction Full Width Half Maximum of the laser in degrees for a Lorentzian shape Y FW 1 e 2 Far Field Y direction Full Width 1 e 2 of the far field in degrees for a Lorentzian shape Y Spot FWHM Y direction Full Width Half Max
200. m dat 0 39758 0 60242 6 1 0 0 2e 6 Aluminum dat 0 31549 0 68451 2 3 0 2e 6 1 0 Aluminum dat 0 25 0 75 4 0 2e 6 1 0 Aluminum dat 0 18451 0 81549 5 0 2e 6 1 0 Aluminum dat 0 10242 0 89758 Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 286 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Figure No 5 E G x File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help i OS aluminum dat DEH tAn RED 10 5 15 0 s10 Using the diffraction efficiency calculator with the Littrow mounting option on the reflected efficiency over the wavelength range 0 5 um to 1 um at normal incidence is Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 287 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Figure Na 4 oO x File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help Denak AAS SPS Reflected Diffraction Efficiency 0 7 U order order 0 6 order 0 5 r a i ti D 2 U4 F iT ff C F 2 a wo O53 ER i r af 7 75 g 5 5 z q 5 10 Lambda meters aig Command Line Variables m_orders Number of orders to be used in the Fourier series that describes the grating n incident Index of refraction of the incident medium n substrate Index of refraction of the substrate base_period The base period in meters num_periods The number of periods to be used when p
201. mage a point with unity magnification 4 Select PROPERTIES from the MENU ITEMS pull down menu Click GO Menu terns Properties hd 5 On the PROPAGATION tab be sure that the following options are selected Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 401 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Figure No 6 Lens Properties Editor File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help setup Propagation Aberration Illuminator Sampling About Propagation Uptions Input to lens 1 Propagation through lens 2 Propagation to target 3 Smal coherent source Simple pupil to pupil mappir ki Focused beam f Chief ray reference f Axis reference Electromagnetic Calculation i Scalar er i Tmage 1 Spee C Vector Sena i So Sa eal iin I L i I Entrance Exit Pupil Pupil Help Cancel OK On both the ABERRATION and ILLUMINATOR tabs select NONE Click OK Note These settings are for use with a coherent source If this lens is imaging using incoherent light some changes must be made Click here to see the appropriate settings 6 Select LENS EDITOR from the MENU ITEMS pull down menu Click GO Menu Items Properties hee Len z E ditar Viewer Settings 7 The lens editor panel should look similar to the following figure Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 402 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of O
202. meter TFT Fresnel Diffraction Multilayer Fluorescent Target Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 317 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Tutorial Creating a Twyman Green Interferometer Description The purpose of this tutorial is to instruct the user on how to create a Twyman Green Interferometer and use it to test mirror optics By using the multiple link function in OPTISCAN to keep the form of a Twyman Green the setup will remain elegant and simple Step 1 Building and Placing the Objects Step 2 Creating the Links Step 3 Labeling the Icons and Links Step 4 Edit the Source Step 5 Edit the Beamsplitter Step 6 Edit the Reference Mirror Step 7 Edit the Test Mirror Step 8 Creating the Mathematical Operation Step 9 Creating a Chain Step 10 Running a Simulation and Viewing the Results See Also NOTE This help pages uses panel images that are note up to date Step 1 Building and Placing the Objects This section instructs the user on how to BUILD each object and then place them in a conducive order l Select BUILD gt SOURCE from the menu at the top of the workspace Place the icon EA on the left hand side of the workspace Select BUILD gt BEAMSPLITTER from the menu The N icon should appear in the upper right hand corner of the workspace Move it to the middle Place a MIRROR right above the BEAMSPLITTER in the workspace by selecting BU
203. modify the properties which are associated with the lens such as the Stop Surface Stop Diameter and LAMBDA The General Lens Properties Area The General Lens Properties Area lets the user modify the lens s Stop Surface Number the Stop Diameter and LAMBDA Stop Surface A 4 a Stop Diameter NA Obiect 14 25e 022 NA Image ea The stop surface determines the placement of the lens group s stop The stop diameter determines which rays cannot pass through the optical lens system The light rays which fall within the object s numerical aperature angle pass through the lens system When the Stop Diameter is modified the corresponding NA object and NA image values are calculated When NA object is changed the corresponding Stop Diameter and NA image values are calculated When NA image is changed the corresponding Stop Diameter and NA object values are calculated Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 73 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences See also Aberrations Panel Auxiliary Command Line Functions Lens Functions Lens Tilts Lens Editor Panel Lens Functions Lens Sampling Panel Lens Setup Panel Lens View Editor Lens Viewer Settings Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 74 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Lens Sampling Panel Description The Lens Sampling panel
204. mple Click here for an example of how to use the thin film calculator Command Line Variables Z0 The amount of defocus in the z axis zotfset The amount of offset from the interface in the z axis n_incident The index of refraction for incident material n_substrate The index of refraction for substrate interface The top position of each layer in the z axis tft_fname The name of the file containing the TFT layers See Also TFT Layer Manager Panel TFT Settings Panel TET Tutorial Command Line Functions Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 291 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Thin Film Calculator Example You do not need any objects in the project to perform the function of this calculator 1 The opening panel looks like that in Fig 1 J Figure No 1 _ _ B x File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help Thin Fila Calculator Index of Incident Medium i Indes of Substrate is Wavelength 6 328e 007 Fananie ES to Em Change Layers f Plot the amplitude Plot the intensity Save Plot Values Reflection Flot Transmission Plot Fig 1 starting panel The first four parameters refer to the initial settings to be set They start out with these values 2 To check the layers press Change Layers to bring up the screen Fig 2 Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 292 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Ariz
205. mple of how the data looks when imported into a spreadsheet Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 49 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences 7 10972730e 002 11 51 31 3 6071031 1e 002 11 51 3 6071031 1e 002 11 51 48 3 6071031 1e 002 11 52 3 6071031 1e 002 11 52 08 2 21081758e 002 11 52 1 17270009e 002 1 16707144e 001 8 11256362e 001 1 18197973e 002 11 52 5 32802621e 001 11 52 11 92207713e 001 11 52 13 The first three columns represent the current in AMPS resulting from the X Y and Z polarizations of the incident field respectively for each scan position of the DELTA object The fourth column is the current resulting from the sum of all three polarizations and represents the physical current that would be measured if the detector is insensitive to polarization The three polarization irradiances are given in case the user wishes to simulate a detector that is sensitive to polarization The last column is a time stamp which lets the user know at what time the data was taken Note that Optiscan will ONLY APPEND the detector data file it will never overwrite it This means that if the user wishes to perform a fresh simulation either the filename of the previous simulation needs to be changed or the detector output filename must be changed Multiple Detector Example Please click here to view an example that uses multiple detectors Adding Layers to a Detector
206. n end Sstore the calculated Total Aerial Irradiance in ex ex 3 10 8 0 5 8 85e 12 abs ex 2 abs ey 2 abs ez 2 Sset the other fields to 0 Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 315 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences ey 0 Supdate the source fieds Simdata Ext ex Simdata Eyt ey Simdata Ezt eZ Simdata Exr 0 Simdata Eyr 0 Simdata Ezr 0 An example system where this script might be used is calculating the Total Aerial Irradiance of a source even though the Source Editor can do this for you without any programming at all Configurable Variables A MOP function can be used in conjunction with a Delta Object For more information about this advanced feature see the information on Configurable Variables Delta Object used with a MOP object Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 316 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Chapter 11 Tutorials Tutorials Optiscan has several tutorials to help the user get familiar with the program Tutorials Main Page O O O O O O 0 0 O O O O Tutorial 1 A Simple Disk Tutorial Scanning Spot Tutorial Lens Functions Auxiliary Command Line Functions Lens Tilts Creating a Thick Lens Coherent and Incoherent Point Source Imaging Convert a Coherent Source to an Incoherent Source Incoherent Lens Settings Twyman Green Interfero
207. n 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences See Also Command Line Functions Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 68 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Lens Editor Panel Purpose The lens editor panel allows the user to make simple changes to the lens surface parameters It also allows for the user to change the type of suface it is by introducing conics and aspheres It has the capabilities to import Zemax lens files to use as the optics The Surface Parameters Area The parameters listed below are described quite well in the Zemax Users Guide Version 8 0a under Chapter 14 Surface Types In fact the parameters and method of display are very similar to the way they are listed in Zemax Parameters unless otherwise specified are in LENSUNITS Specifies the tilt of the surface in degrees around the x y and z axes The z axis is the direction of Tit Sa mi aa propagation ee eet Here is a link to the Using Tilts help page Soe ee a Decenter T He Specifies the decenter of the surface Decenter t Rete 2i Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 69 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Radius The radius of the surface z The thickness from the vertex Radius Inf Thickness of the surface to the vertex of Thickness ap the following surface Index E The index of refraction
208. n OPTISCAN will randomly choose N Source Points without replacement from the X Y and Z components of the input field The non zero values of the resulting selection are used as incoherent source points If the sampling style is grid then OPTISCAN will select grid 2 points by forming new ordinate and abcissa vectors as shown sysxvec linspace min sysxvec max sysxvec grid sysyvec linspace min sysyvec max sysyvec grid Interpolation is then used to determine grid 2 values The non zero values of the resulting interpolation are then used as incoherent source points The base index is used with the save and restore fields objects The source point files are numbered as follows source_point 1000 mat source_point 1001 mat source_point 1002 mat etc The number scheme is IncoherentBaselndex ii where ii 0 NSourcePoints 1 See Also Save and Restore Fields Filenames Partially Coherent Not Implemented Yet Babinet Not Implemented Yet Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 64 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Specifying the Value for Lambda The Source s Lambda portion of the Source Type Panel allows the user to specify the source s wavelength LAMBDA Source s LAMBDA Wave Length Update Simulators LAMBDA With This One If the Update Simulator s LAMBDA With This One check box is a checked then the Optiscan Simulation Engine wi
209. n example of the Binary Optic 2 parameters Binary optics also known as kinoforms are very similar to diffraction gratings where small grooves across the optical surface impart a change in phase of the passing wavefront The binary optics surface is similar to the extended asphere surface with additional polynomial terms to represent the variation in phase therefore the coefficients have units of radians instead of lens units If the user is familiar with Zemax this should be familiar It is well explained in the Zemax Users Guide The main difference between an aspheric surface and a binary is the diffraction element of the binary This is the Extra Data Matrix which is only used for Binary Optic 2 and not the other types More information on the extra data editors can be found in Chapter 6 Editors Menu and Chapter 14 Surface Types of the Zemax Users Guide Copyright 2005 University of Arizona OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences See also Aberrations Panel Auxiliary Command Line Functions Lens Functions Lens Tilts Lens Functions Lens Properties Panel Lens Sampling Panel Lens Setup Panel Lens View Editor Lens Viewer Settings Back the the Lens View Editor Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 72 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Lens Properties Panel Purpose The Lens Properties Panel allows the user to
210. n the top and select EDIT Below is the default for a reflective target Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 330 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Figure No 4 reference mirror for arm one M1 Properties Editor Selig File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help Views ColorMaps Magnitude Min O Max 1 Max Target Files l Ex tarls mat Target Mask Bulk Reflection Menu lbens Properties VYalue A 33126 0065 Y 3 7Se 006 Help 2 The first step is to set the size of the mirror Go into the mirror PROPERTIES and select the DIMENSIONS tab Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 331 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Figure No 4 reference mirror for arm one M1 Properties Editor Sek File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help Dimensions Window Dimensions About Dimensions width Length Offset Y Offset oo ampling 7 81 25e 005 Y sampling 7 8125e 005 Help Cancel OF 3 The size of the mirror should be the same as the source so set all the numbers as shown above 4 Click on the WINDOW DIMENSIONS tab and click FULL WINDOW to quickly make the whole window the active area Click OK to save changes and go back to the main editor screen Editing the Bulk Reflection 1 Now that the dimensions are set the BULK REFLECTION needs to be made uniform Make sure that unde
211. nager Panel O Magneto Optical Target MO Settings Panel MO Layer Manager Panel Multiple Level Lithography Multilayer Fluorescent Object Polarization Object O Polarization Settings Panel Propagation Object O Angular Spectrum Propagation O O O Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 36 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Illuminator Lens Panel Description This option is chosen when the lens group describes either Kohler or Critical illumination on a target This option must be used with a second lens group that describes the projection camera The uminator Lens is used with Incoherent Source files Illuminator Type Kohler y Mone i lllurinator Type Critical None Kohler Critical No Illuminator Lens is used default The sigma is ignored This option assumes that the target 1 e a lithographic mask is placed in the exit pupil of the optical system The source distribution is imaged into the entrance pupil of the projection camera The incoherent source distribution is resized based on the entrance pupil diameter of the associated projection camera The width of the source is resized so that its image fits within the projection camera entrance pupil Changing sigma effectively apertures the source with an iris sigma diameter of source image entrance pupil diameter This option is not available with the current
212. name of saved file after calculation For PSFs plane1001 1001 for geometrical images plane1001 1002 The script delta is for moving the observation planes In the top menu of the main window click the edit object Click the script delta Click the Edit Then the code will come out The name of that is planar_source_defocus m Around the line 43 in that code you will see the following POPP POPP OPPO POPP gt PPP PPP OPPO PPO OOD POPP POPP OPPO OOO gt gt PPP PP PPP POOP OPO OD PPP PPP OPPO PPO OPO PPP POPP OPPO PPO gt gt gt Fo Fo Fo Fo Fo To Fo Fo Fo Fo Fo Fo Fo Fo Fo Fo To Fo Fo To Fo Fo Fo Fo Fo Fo Fo To Fo Fo Fo Fo Fo Fo Fo To Fo Fo To Fo To To Fo Fo Fo Fo To Fe Fo Fo Fo Fo Fo Fo To Fo Fo Fo Fo Fo To Fo Fo Fo Fo To Fo Fo Fo Fo Fo Fo Fo To Fo Fo Fo Fo Fo Fo Fo Fo Fo Fo Fo Po Fo Fo Po Fo Po Po Po Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 124 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences setup parameters Fo Fo To Fo Fo To Fo Fo Fo Fo Fo Fo Fo Fo Fo Fo To Fo Fo To Fo Fo Fo Fo Fo Fo Fo To Fo Fo Fo Fo Fo Fo Fo To Fo Fo To Fo Fo To Fo Fo Fo Fo To Fe Fo Fo Fo Fo Fo Fo To Fo Fo To Fo To To Fo Fo Fo Fo To Fo Fo Fo Fo Fo Fo Fo Fo Fo Fo Fo Fo Fo Fo Fo Fo Fo Fo Fo Po Fo Fo Po Fo Po Po Vo initial_val 10e 3 increment 20e 3 10 KIIIIIIII II III II III II III III III III MK MCC lt i MK MEK III Here unit 1s mm initial_val means the starting point And the increment is 20e 3 10 that is
213. nce ie Axis reference Small The source is taken to be coherent coherent Source To Entrance Pupil source n Small The source is sampled a specific Input to leng 1 incoherent number of times Each sampled point l herent source source acts as a radiator that is incoherent mal CONBENE Source with its neighbors c mall coherent source ae ai ce Direct input at Direct input for field data on a Direct input at entrance pupil entrance pupil reference sphere in the entrance pupil of the lens Hone None No calculations are performed on the input fields at this point Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 78 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Entrance Pupil to Exit Pupil Calculation Propagation through lens 2 Simple pupil to pupil mappin Hone Exit Pupil to Target Calculation Fropagation to target a Focused beam E Focused beam Out of focus beam Stop at ext pupil Simple pupil to pupil mapping Ray based pupil to pupil mapping None Focused beam Out of focus beam Stop at exit pupil 79 This method uses first order propagation from entrance pupil to exit pupil A general purpose option that traces a grid of rays through the optical system and determines the optical aberrations in the exit pupil the cutoff of energy by the stop and the pupil aberrations If the Ray Trace option is sel
214. nces Help Button brings up a Web Browser to display the OPTISCAN Help Desk Calc Button initiates a simulation by displaying the System Preferences Dialog See Also Simple Disk Tutorial Links Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 21 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences OPTISCAN Help Desk Introduction An Introduction to Optiscan OptiScan Basics A Simple Disk Tutorial Startup Wizard Panel An Introduction to the Project Workspace The About Panel Reference Troubleshooting and FAQs User Notes Update Descriptions Computer Requirements Optiscan Tutorials Optiscan Cheat Sheet Table of Contents by subject Index in alpahbetical order Publications Email Comments and Suggestions to optiscan optics arizona edu Milster Group Home Page Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 22 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences New features in OPTISCAN version 6 1 Compatability with MATLAB 6 5 Detector Layer Option Located in the Detector Properties Editor A new feature added to the Simple Responsivity Detector that allows the user to have multiple layers inside one detector object Fiber Detector Located in the build menu of the project workspace Calculates the coupling efficiency of an optical fiber Optical Fiber Calculator Located in the accessories menu of the project work
215. nd Line Variables o_phase The phase retardation of the ordinary axis Default is 90 degrees e_phase The phase retardation of the extra ordinary axis Default is O degrees rotation The rotation angle of the polarizer Deafult is 45 degrees See Also Command Line Functions Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 128 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Propagation Object Parameters Description Allows the user to modify the Propagation Object s parameters For most calculations the Propagation Object uses a simple angular spectrum calculation to find the field after propagating a specified distance In some cases when the number of non zero values in the input matrix is small the calculation uses an approximate integral method The approximate integral method saves a significant amount of calculation time Vector fields are calculated separately and the refractive index of the propagation medium is unity Configurable Parameters Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 129 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Figure No 3 Pro Golfer Properties Editor File Edit view Insert Tools Window Help Setup Dimensions About Prooagation Parameters Auboscale Input Options Specify Output Range and scaling Do not scale the input Use the Dimensions panel to specify the output oF Total propagati
216. nd then the Target The first object that is clicked is augmented with a selection box After the Target is clicked on the Link 1s constructed and the Source s selection box is removed The T on the link stands for Transmitted This denotes that the link passes transmitted electric fields Create the rest of the models links as shown on the right The arrows denote the flow of light through the Optical System Saving the System Step 1 Feel free to save the system at any time throughout the tutorial The system file contains the parameters of each object and their layout The masks scripts and I O data are permanently stored in the project s various folders Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 350 System save System _ Preferences Delete link OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Modify Link Attributes Step 1 Click on the Edit link radio button in the Project Window Delete link Step 2 Click on the Link between the See Link Properties Target and Look The Link Properties editor should be displayed Step 3 Modify the Link Type to Link Settin gs roar Reflected Fields This is done because light is Link Type reflected of the target and we wish to look at these reflected aan C Transmitted Field electric fields AE a i Object Field Operation Step 4 Modify the Delta Target link type to Object F
217. ndex depth matrices Faraday rotation matrices matrices N tar_br d tar_dp Nyy tar yy N tar_br d tar_dp N tat_yy N tar_br d tar_dp Getting Started Click on the Build menu in the main model panel point to Targets and click on Transmission Target Click on Arrange Object and drag the target to the desired position The two dimensional distribution of the matrix elements can be edited with the 2d viewer The default parameters are all zero except for tar_br Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 108 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Command Line Variables width_x The width of the transmission target length_y The length of the transmission target offx The offset of the transmission target from the optical axis in the x direction offy The offset of the transmission target from the optical axis in the y direction offz The offset of the transmission target from the optical axis in the z direction xsample The sample spacing in the x direction ysample The sample spacing in the y direction window_width_x The width of the window that scans over the transmission target window_length_y The length of the window that scans over the transmission target window_xcenter The x coordinate of the scan window s center window_ycenter The y coordinate of the scan window s center target_x_file Name of the file that has the x polarized target inf
218. nent of Y component of component of itt 5 0 Pea Final system II Simulate the System and then Look at the X Y and Z electric fields Note that the diffrence of y component of electric field from system I The component eleciric field spreads out due to diffraction and aberration of phase change recording media Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 448 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Thin Film Target Slide 21 a click on Look Piot han get gea children cdata get han cdata figure D 256 25 256 25 ocolor cdata p p colorbar colormap hot shading interp As easier method Is to use the save field data rather that cdata Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 449 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Thin Film Target Slide 22 a Appendix B Journal Papers Using Optiscan s TFT Model Tom D Mister Joshua S Jo Kusate Hirota Kel Shimura and Yan hang The nature of the coupling field in optical data storage using solid immersion lens accepted to J Jon Appl Phys 1998 Tom D Mister Joshua S Jo Kusate Hirota The Roles of Propagating and Evanescent Wawes In Solid Immersion Lens Systems Applied optics 199 Tom O Mister Kel Shimura Joshua Ss Jo and Kusato Hirota Pupil plane filtenng for improved signal detection in an optic
219. new target geometry Click the PROPERTIES in the MENU ITEMS Scroll down to REPLACE A PIECE in the MENU ITEMS Then click GO Click browse Then Find the bitmap file Here we have bmp files in the directory of c bmp bmp so open file circle1 bmp click Next You can change the size of window here Choose the proper WIDTH and LENGTH If you want to have full size of window then click the FULL WIN Click NEXT button Bitmap min is set to O it will show as black color which means no fluorescent and bit map max is set to 1 Then click NEXT You can change the file name of data differently using BROWSE if you want Then click the FINISH button So right now you have fluorescent target Then scroll the menu items then see the manage layers Click go Here you can make more layers or reduce the number of layers and you can change the index of refraction in the data 15t go to the N Reference Here default value is 1 5 you can change this to fit your data And go to z step This tells the thickness of data in the z axis The z total is also same concept And 2e 6 means 2um here unit is MKSA Click the first del This del object does the propagation into the data in the z axial direction You will see the step size and thickness menu in the delta parameters Click step size And go to SCALER OPTIONS Type 2e 6 in the STEP VALUE And type 10 in the modulo count when the fluorescent target has 10 lay
220. ng options Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 171 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Monte Carlo Analysis Description Optiscan has the capability to do a Monte Carlo Analysis by using Gooey Delta Variables You can choose between uniformly distributed random numbers and gaussian curve distributed random numbers Getting Started See Also Getting Started The first step is to build a Gooey Delta object and link it to all the objects you want to include in the Monte Carlo analysis See Gooey Delta Panel and Scalar Delta Variables for more information on how to set them up Make sure you set all the variables to use Monte Carlo in the Scalar options only scalar variables can be used in the Monte Carlo analysis Output After the simulation is finished a file will open that contains the values of the variable during the simulation If you run another simulation that involves the same variable and uses Monte Carlo analysis then the new values will be written to the same file The time of the simulation is also written to the file so you can tell which set of values is which If you want to start over with a clean file simply delete or move the existing file The file 1s saved in the current project s userdata directory with the name of the variable as the filename See Also Monte Carlo Uniform Monte Carlo Gaussian RSS Analysis Copyright 2005 University of Ar
221. ng picture fim Step 3 Observing the System Output 1 Place a LOOK object by selecting BUILD gt TOOLS gt LOOK 2 Move the LOOK so that it is close to the PROPAGATE icon similar to the following Step 4 Linking the Elements 1 Select MAKE LINK from the workspace menu 2 Click on the x icon and then click on the 8 icon This will make a yellow arrow with the letter T in the center of it signifying that the light will travel from the source icon to the propagation icon 3 Click on the 8 icon and then click on the icon Another yellow arrow with a T in the middle of it will appear This tells the program to observe the light coming through the icon The workspace should now look like the following picture eym e O O O o o e g e a o o Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 459 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Step 5 Creating a Chain 1 Select ADD LINK TO CHAIN from the workspace menu 2 Click on the arrow between the x and E icons Then click on the arrow between the 8 and icons The schematic will now look similar to the following p e SS m m a g e e a o o o o e 3 Select SYSTEM gt SAVE to save the project Step 6 Running a Simulation and Viewing the Output 1 Click on the CALC button to simulate the setup 2 Set CHAIN COUNT to 1 LAMBDA to 6 328e 007 and USERDATA FOLDER to userdata 3 Click OK 4 The
222. nge of refractive index with wavelength for a particular material The format of the file is shown below Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 285 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences 0 56113636363636 1 01800000000000 6 84600000000000 0 51437500000000 0 82600000000000 6 28300000000000 0 47480769230709 0 69500000000000 5 80000000000000 0 44089285714286 0 59800000000000 5 38500000000000 0 41150000000000 5 02400000000000 0 38578125000000 4 70800000000000 0 36308823529412 4 42600000000000 0 34291666666667 4 17400000000000 0 32486842105263 3 94600000000000 0 30862500000000 3 74000000000000 Note index of refraction n n 1 n The file consists of three columns of data that are tab delimited The first column lists the wavelength in microns the second column lists the real part of the refractive index and the third column lists the imaginary part of the refractive index The RCWT calculator interpolates between entries in this file when necessary to conduct calculations Do not include the column labels such as lambda n and n in the dispersion file All dispersion files should be stored in the directory oscan workfunc calcrcwt materials The extension for the dispersion files is dat Example The following is an example of a 1 micron deep cosine grating with a 1 micron period Layer number Height Index 1 Index 2 Duty cycle vector 1 0 2e 6 1 0 Aluminu
223. niversity of Arizona College of Optical Sciences This causes the simulator to stop simulating Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 148 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Script Tool Properties Purpose The script tool panel allows the user to associate a script file with either a Delta object or a MOP object Script Setup Area The Script Setup Area allows the user to select the script which is associated with the Delta object The m files that the project uses are stored in the scripts folder of the project Script Setup OPTISCAN Predefined Scripts motion m a Actwe Script File none gt Import Selected Tipo Custom Imports the file that is selected in the Optiscan Predefined Scripts listbox The user is asked what the imported script should be called example my_motion m import Selected a o is Imports a custom m file that the user wrote The user is asked where the m file is located on the disk and what the user wants to call it Import Custom Brings up an editor so the user can edit the Active Script File E dit Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 149 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Custom Delta Files see delta scripts Custom Mop Files see mop scripts Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 150 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona
224. niversity of Arizona 399 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences s Figure No 3 Source Properties Editor File Edit wiew Insert Tools Window Help Views ColorMaps Magnitude v40 Min 0 Max 0 516497 Wax Source File stce mat Source Mask x Source lin y Value ae Y Help Close 22 Click CLOSE 23 Drag the SOURCE icon into the middle of the workspace Step 2 Place and Edit a Lens This step instructs the user on how to use the lens editor to simulate a 100 mm focal length lens Note The lens used in this design is a thin lens 1 From the BUILD menu select OPTICS The n icon should appear in the upper right hand corner of the workspace 2 RIGHT click the OPTICS icon and select EDIT 3 The following window should now be displayed Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 400 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences A Figure No 3 Lens Properties Editor Seles File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help View Axis Menu ten Properties 10 7 axis gt The default OPTICS object in OptiScan is a system of 2 thin lenses each with a focal length of 20 mm Also they are arranged such that the system s magnification is unity For this tutorial it is desired that the system consist of only one 100 mm focal length thin lens This lens is also set up to i
225. nsmitted Value NaN A UOO4SS4 Y 0 01007 5 All of the fringes are created from the interference of the two waves You can see the bump on the bottom lefthand side This signifies that there is a bump on the test mirror where the surface is closer to the beamsplitter If the deformation on the result were to dip down this would signify that the defect on the test mirror is actually a pit or chip where the surface is farther away You can also barely see the deformation in the result from the defect in the upper right hand corner Since it is much smaller the deformation or bump is much less Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 344 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences visible but it is still there You can choose to view different components by selecting options from the VIEWS menu like only the REAL values or the PHASE By changing the views it might be easier to see the effect of the small defect See Also Tutorials Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 345 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Optiscan Tutorials r f Fi S n r Sr Main Help Desk lt Table of Contents Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 346 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Desc Build a source Reflect it off a rotating disk View the reflected fields Focus a Gaussian Beam
226. nt Value Area is disabled when Zoom is on Profile Plots Click on the plot to display a Profile Plot Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 227 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences An X Y Profile Plot is displayed when the mouse is clicked on the plot The Profile Plot below shows the Gaussian distribution of the plot shown above The X Y Profile Plot feature is disabled while Zoom is on E Figure No 4 Profile Flot ey T ta i Profile 0 9 Y Profile Magnitude Profile Plot co 2 Gy aa ie co Magnitude Value om Ti Position MKS units Selecting A Plot Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 228 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences The Plot Selection Area can be used to select which plot should be shown The top listbox in A contains the name of the plot file The top listbox is shown in more detail in B The bottom listbox in A contains the plots which can be viewed The bottom listbox is show in more detail in C Source File Sasso Pee lessee i 3 a i oe H EE Ee ea eS py ay a L L Li A B C eee ee ey na mn oar 21 1 mat TEL Ti i anai i COLELELLTECII i munnsunnunnnn A 2 B 2 C 2 Menu Items Control Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 229 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of O
227. nt layer is the layer which is selected N Reference Pees The index of refraction for the layer Z Total mies i e O0 The thickness for the layer Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 114 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Tools ols Import List Imports a previously created TFT layer list O NewLaper e Inserts a new TFT layer before the current TFT layer See Also Thin Film Layer Manager Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 115 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences MO Settings Panel Description The MO Settings Panel allows you to modify the general parameters used in the MO Magneto Optical Target calculation MO Index Settings m MO Indes Setnge ET The index of refraction for incident material n substrate i eee Te The index of refraction for substrate MO General Parameters E MO General Farameters ae zl 0 The amount of defocus in the z axis E ny o Off diagonal element of permittivity oise a _ The amount of offset from the interface in the Z axis interface 1 The top position of each layer in the z axis ResultField Pupil Observe the electric field at Pana one ei the exit pupil i Image Observe the electric field at the optical disk Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 116 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona
228. nt no hores cence The x y or top view of data is showr We can make ary shape of data marks by making the replace option ard open any bmp file that you made for mark And you can bung it to the window that is VALY new mark Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 481 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Multilayer Fluorescent Target Slide 8 a CFTICAL DATA STORAGE CENTEA OP TISCAN Hep Fes brico ker atimagig 5 Part I 24 scanning radially pr The scanning window moves fadially with the step Indosoey delta asition get the 10 layers Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 482 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Multilayer Fluorescent Target Slide 9 a CAFTICAL DATA STORAGE CENTER OP TECAN Hep Fes dor coher stimagig g Part II Image the fluorescence from each layer with the pickup lens Thisis a pickup lens thatreisi ages every electric field result including focus position and defocused positions from data layers onto the one detector plane Also you can change the pickup lens if you like such as different ail The script delta tool is used to pickup every data position including focus and defocus regon The number of chan calculationis equal to the mimber of data layers Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 483 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Op
229. object The GUI Delta object can now be used to change lens parameters Layer specific variables for the MO and TFT objects can now be changed previously only the overall variables could be changed Monte Carlo analysis can now be done using the GUI Delta Both uniformly distributed random numbers and gaussian distributed random numbers can be generated RSS analysis is now available and we have a highly experimental version of the auto range option XFDTD Conversion Calculators These Calculators are used to interface time domain output of the XFDTD finite difference time domain program from Remcom Inc to Optiscan XFDTD produces files that contain snapshots of the electric field from near field geometries The calculator converts XFDTD time domain data into complex amplitude and phase for x y and z polarization directions Complex data are in Matlab matrix format Please see the help files for more information Improvements to the 2D viewer A new option is added that allows the user to save the current layer to a new file for use in another object A menu of several color maps is available so the user can easily switch between different views of the same data The available color maps are jet hot gray and hsv Other color maps and figure operations can be entered via the Matlab command line Laser diode calculator The Laser Diode Calculator is a shortcut to calculate field distributions for known laser
230. of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Making Optiscan Writable Windows 98 nA BW NHN Re 6 T 8 Click Start choose Find then choose Files or folders Click Browse and choose your main Optiscan directory In the box labeled Named type m Click Find Now When your computer finishes searching select all the files that were found by clicking on the first file and then hold the Shift key down on your keyboard while clicking on the last file Right click on the selected files Choose properties and uncheck the Read only option and click OK Repeat steps 3 7 using mat in step 3 Windows 2000 I 2 3 4 Right click on your main Optiscan directory and choose properties Uncheck the Read only option and click apply Choose Apply changes to this folder subfolders and files and click OK Click OK on the properties window Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 6 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Introduction The OptisScan program is a tool for simulating the operation of optical systems What differentiates OptisScan from other simulation software is the wide range of wave optics phenomena that are available and the graphical user interface GUI OptisScan can be used as a simple demonstrator of idealized systems or the user can simulate complicated effects like interaction with multiple layer targets and vector diffraction OptisSc
231. on distance m 1e 00 Hote The Propagation Operator does not change the sense of the fields That is transmitted Helds remain transmitted fields and reflected fields remain reflected fields Usually an Angular spectrum technique propagates the held However if the number of held points is very small lt 100 an approximate pointwise technique is used that depends on the distance propagated and the size of the fields Auto scaling theinput a good idea it the held distibution extends tothe edge of the input matis However ican take eignificnatly longer due to the larger matris size Setting the S pecify Output Range and Scaling menu has no effect on calculation accuracy Help Cancel Ok HARAMETER DESCRIPTION Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 130 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences A utoscale There are two choices for how to specify the input options The input field is used directly in the propagation calculation No zero padding is implemented A utoscale the input The input field is zero padded so that the maximum axial dimension of the nonzero field component is one third of the matrix dimension This option is useful when the field extends to the boundary of the input matrix However the zero padding often significantly increases the dimension and number of calculation points so memory resources and computation time can become burdened
232. ona College of Optical Sciences I Figure No 1 z Sox Fie Edit view Insert Tools Window Help TFT Layers Layerlist Filename About Laver List 1 1 Laver Parameters To Clipboard N Aeference 14 2 Total 1 007 Paste Last EA Tools Clipboard TFT Layer Import List New Layer Help Cancel GK Fig 2 layer manager window 3 Notice that there may be one or more layers listed and they all have the same name TFT Layer There may even be no layers listed At the top of the box will be an indicator it tells which layer is currently selected If there are layers listed the values to the right are the index of refraction N Reference and layer thickness Z Total These values will be set at whatever values they were last set for If there are more than one layer then click Cut until there is only one layer Set its N Reference to 1 and Z Total to 1E 7 Click OK 4 Now press Transmission Plot to bring up Fig 3 Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 293 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences LT aio File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help Demakan pp Amplitude of Transmitted S component Amplitude of Transmitted F component 05 Ub U4 0 2 i 100 0 100 106 0 100 Incident Angle degrees Incident Angle degrees Phase of Transmitted S component Phase of Transmitted P component BU BL 100 400 U 100 Incident Angle d
233. ormation target_y_file Name of the file that has the y polarized target information target_z_file Name of the file that has the z polarized target information Notes Make sure that any links going out of the transmission target are Transmitted Fields links See Link Parameters Panel See Also 2d viewer Link Parameters Panel Reflective Target Command Line Functions Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 109 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences TFT Settings Panel Description The TFT Settings Panel allows you to modify the general parameters used in the TFT Thin Film Target calculation Figure No 3 Thin Film Target Properties Editor KIB File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help TFT Settings TFT Layers Layerlist Filename About TET Index Settings H incident 12 M Use Dispersion File H substrate 95 0 016 Use Dispersion File TFT General Parameters Type of Calculation From lens pupil to far field hi Cinnsteck tran toacus 2h auto 20 layer of interest interlace at top of laper Hote Set interlace 0 to wew only reflected field reterericed to top of layers Help Cancel OK TFT Index Settings ARAMETER DESCRIPTION incident The complex refractive index of the incident medium N substrate The complex refractive index of the substrate medium Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 110 OptiScan 6 2 0 Use
234. own above the two points are barely resolvable By increasing the NA of the lens i e increasing the lens diameter the resolvability of the two points can be improved Change the stop diameter to 76 2 mm 3 inches and run the simulation again The following output should be seen Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 418 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences olj File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help views ColorMaps Aerial irradiance 0m2 p40 Min 4 50262e 017 Max 0 00392657 15 Max Look Data File plot 3 5 71 mat l Look D ta Transmitted 0 5 0 5 Al amj F5 Mlin hd r 05 U 0 5 1 5 x10 Value 1 fUbe UUS A 1 341e 009 Y 1 465e 005 Help Close Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 419 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Figure No 4 Profile Plot E iojxj File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help JD SHS KAASL PEr e407 Aerial Iradiance WWim2 Profile Plot Profile a5 Y Profile Aerial Iradiance wiz Value cs Th E 2 2 1 5 0 5 0 0 5 1 TS 2 Position MES units 5 The same thing can be done with an incoherent source For a review of how to change the source type to incoherent click here Also don t forget to change the lens settings For a 50 8 mm aperture with a magnification of 1 5 the output looks like the follo
235. patterns for X Y and Z polarizations are displayed The default fiber detector in Optiscan is square shaped with dimensions of 10 microns x 10 microns and a sampled array size of 200x200 The default X and Y polarization mode patterns are single mode Gaussians 2 with 1 e radii of 1 944 microns at a wavelength of 1550 nm corresponding to a fiber core diameter of 5 microns The indices of refraction for the core and cladding used in calculating the 1 e radius are neo 1 5 and n yg 1 4 The default mode pattern for the Z polarization direction is zero because the optical fields are presumed to be completely transverse to the axis of the fiber Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 56 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences t Figure No 3 Fiber Detector Properties Editor File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help Views ColorMaps Magnitude hin 1 03682e 023 Max 1 Max Detector Files i Ex fbT mat Detector Mask Polarization T Menu lene Properties Y Value 0 6357 A ror Y The The size and sampling of the fiber detector can be reconfigured by the user by selecting the PROPERTIES menu item and clicking on GO This opens the DETECTOR DIMENSIONS window This window functions exactly like the DIMENSIONS windows for the SOURCE object SIMPLE RESPONSIVITY DETECTOR and the many TARGET objects The size offset and sampling rates can be easily reconfigured b
236. pecified that the system has unity magnification the system must be set up such that the distance from the object to the 1 principal plane P is 2f and the distance from the rear principal plane P to the image is 2f For simplicity s sake this lens is also biconvex meaning that R R2 Knowing that the lens being used has a focal length of 100 mm equation 3 can be used to calculate R and R2 From the information given it is found that R 97 4342 mm and R gt 97 4342 mm The interested reader may verify these numbers by solving the quadratic equation that equation 3 becomes when R4 R3 is substituted into equation 2 Using equations 4 and 5 the principal plane shifts delta and delta are found to be 5 13167 mm respectively The distance from the object to the 15t vertex is 200 mm 5 13167 mm 194 868 mm This is also the same distance as that from the 24 vertex to the image Now that all of the radii and distances are known values may be entered Start with surface 1 The values for surface 1 are shown in the picture below Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 384 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Figure Mo 3 Lens Properties Editor File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help Lens Settings Lens Editor Parameters for Surface 1 of 5 Radius m inp Thickness m 1948683 Index eC Conic fo Diameter m aE Tilt radians Fi ooo Tit rad
237. previous results may be verified by conducting the same experiment in the laboratory Setup objective f 950 mm l g 0 25 Ed CCT Laser A 652 8 pinhole Pg Amm aperture 15 microns Materials HeNe Laser 632 8 nm polarizer microscope objective 10x NA 0 25 pinhole 15 micron diameter achromatic doublet f 250 mm shearing interferometer circular aperture 2 mm diameter CCD camera computer with camera software Note A 40x microscope objective with a numerical aperture of 0 55 was used in conjunction with a 140 mm achromat to obtain the data for the N 3 diffraction pattern This was found to further reduce aberrations that were not critical in the system for the N 5 and 8 cases Procedure Setup the equipment as shown above The objective lens of the camera should be removed so that the CCD array is exposed Setup the microscope objective such that it is focused on the 15 micron pinhole This creates a pinhole spatial filter which filters out the aberrations inherent in the laser Adjust the 140 mm achromat so that its front focal point coincides with the location of the 15 micron pinhole This will create a collimated beam exiting from the lens Use the shearing interferometer to make sure that the light exiting the lens is collimated and free of aberrations Place the camera at the desired viewing distance from the 2 mm circular aperture Use the computer in conjunction with the camera software to c
238. program will generate a 2 D view of the system output by default A window similar to the following should now be seen Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 460 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Figure Mo 3 File Edit View Insert RE Window Helo Views ColorMlaps Magnitude y WW Min O O005 14727 Mas 1 97124 Max ook Data File plot 2 5 1 1 mat x Look Data A Transmitted Value 1 73 A DEFF Y 2245 5 The irradiance W m of the pattern may be displayed by selecting VIEWS gt ARIAL IRRADIANCE COMPONENT from the top menu bar Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 461 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences A Figure Mo 3 File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help Views Men miyEne Aerial irradiance W me2 p40 Min 3 51713e 010 Max 0 00515837 Max ook Data File Iplot 2 5 1 1 mat Look Data Transmitted VYalue 04H 00001052 0 001056 6 The Colormap may be adjusted such that output corresponds to what would likely be seen in a laboratory Here it is desired that the irradiance be displayed using a gray scale colormap To do this select VIEWS gt ARIAL IRRADIANCE COMPONENT and COLORMAPS gt GRAY The output will now look like the following Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 462 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences
239. pt the changes by amp Arrange Object Edit Object P Delete Object The Variable Tool Panel should be displayed Arid Which Variable Sewin Center vin Center Use These Settings for X Win Center m S aler Desctiptian X Center of Window Scaler Options iawa M Use Objects Initial Value Modulo Count of Calcul atio n Options Hids eda is Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 353 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Set the Size of the Source Step 1 Edit The Source Step 2 Choose Properties from the Menu Items and the click Go Step 3 Modify the source s Dimensions Source Type About dimensions and offsets to match those shown on the right ae Dimensions Typically the x offset is ape ni equal to Yvieath spacer gif EEG Length 825 width 2 5 7 fee bytes Offsets This values will center Sti eee eOttset the source on both the X i ee and Y axes fe o Offset sampling Sampling ySampling ss festa Configuring the Target Step 1 Edit The Target Step 2 Choose Add Piece from the Menu Items and the click Go Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 354 Step 3 Step 4 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences The first step is to tell optiscan where the piece mask is located You can use
240. ptical Sciences Figure Mo 6 Lens Properties Editor File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help Lens Settings Lens Editor General Lens Parameters stop Surface En Stop Diameter m ooo HA Object oo 0S NA Image 0049938 oooO xobiectheitm G yobjectheiaht m o Sin Theta m ray 0 049938 Help Cancel OK In this example a lens with a diameter of 2 will be used so change the STOP DIAMETER to 50 8e 3 Note All units are in millimeters so 2 50 8 mm 8 Click on the LENS EDITOR tab 9 The following window should now be present Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 403 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Figure Mo 6 Lens Properties Editor File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help Lens Settings Lens Editor Parameters for Surface 1 of 5 Radius ml fing Thickness m o0 Index E Core Diameter m Tilt amp radians Fi ooo Tit radians 0 Titz radian p Decenter rm e Decenter m nn Glass File MODEL Extra Data Matrix Add i Element H Addi BROWSE Lise Functor lt l Dell saf os ee o oo e o ce x 10 Since it is specified that the system has unity magnification the system must be set up such that the distance from the object to the image is 4f Knowing that the lens being used has a focal length of 100 mm the object distance must therefore be 200 mm To specify this set the THICKNESS of surface 1 to 0 2m
241. ptical Sciences The Menu Items portion of the Optiscan 2D Viewer allows you to work with the Optiscan Object that is associated with the displayed images Ment thems Properties i Go The following is a sample menu Properties Displays the associated object s properties and lets the user edit them Allows the displayed Replace _ image to be partly or A Piece totally replaced by Menu tems another image Pe z Allows the displayed PREE n Piene Multiply A _ image to be partly or Multiply Fiece Piece totally multiplied by Add Piece another image Allows another image Adda __ to be partly or totally Piece added to the displayed image Save Laver Allows the current layer to be saved into n a new file When the Go Button is clicked then the selected item in the Menu Items is performed Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 230 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences The Zoom Pan Control zoom in to see more detail by the arrow The Zoom Pan Control can be used to translate the plot left and right and to By clicking on the arrows the plot will be translated in the direction shown By clicking on the M the following menu will be displayed Zoom Option Zoom On Zoom X Zoom Y Zoom Out Reset Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 231 Description When the plot is clicked on the magnification factor i
242. ption Rigorous coupled wave theory RCWT is an exact rigorous solution to Maxwell s equations for a plane wave incident on a physical possibly multi layered structure that is infinite in extent and periodic in one dimension This calculator is designed to use RCWT to simulate multi layered grating structures This help file is designed for reference only For a thorough description of the fundamentals of the RCWT calculator please read the RCWT Manual located at oscan rcwt_calc_panel RCWTmanual doc Getting Started Main Calculator Panel RCWT Settings RCWT Layers Layerlist Filename Plane Wave Settings Diffraction Efficiency Calculator Basis Set Generator Dispersion Files Example Command Line Variables See Also Getting Started To use the RCWT calculator select Accessories gt RCWT Calculator from the top menu bar This opens the main calculator panel Accessories Help Optical Fiber Calculator Gaussian Beam Width Calculator Laser Diode Calculator TFT Calculator SPOTD Conversion Tools RCW Calculator Waveguide Onalyzer Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 276 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Main Calculator Panel The main calculator panel is the primary interface for the calculator From this panel there are buttons which allow the user to define a grating structure generate a basis set calculate diffraction efficiency and simulate
243. ptions The module offers User selectable pupil sampling Physical Optics Fields Optiscan uses matrices to describe the amplitude and phase of vector electromagnetic fields at each node in the calculation chain Both transmitted and reflected field information is available to the user Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 32 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences 2D Viewer The 2d viewer helps maintain consistency by providing a single interface across several objects namely the Sources Targets and Detectors The 2d viewer is where custom and catalog patterns come in Catalog Patterns These are the pre made patterns that are available in Optiscan e Uniform x d r Data Mark b rN Circle High Frequency data pattern EE EE OOM lov Frequency ES EE E E E Inter symbol interference data pattern Custom Patterns These are the patterns that can be created to the users specification Gaussian Super Gaussian Hermite Mix and match O Exponential O Gaussian O SuperGaussian Linear Ramp Pyramid Function One Dimensional Grating Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 33 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences O Rectangular Fourier Series Work in progress A new version of Optiscan is scheduled to be released later this Fall New features will include Monte Carlo Analysis RSS Analysis Holographic opt
244. r Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 101 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Layer Manager The layer manager portion of the Manage Layers Panel lets you manipulate the layers in the target Layer List leayerl mat To Clipboard Clipboard layer3 mat The Clipboard shows the current Clipboard Layer Faste Faste Last A Rename To Clipboard Copies the currently selected Clipboard layer3 mat layer to af the Clipboard aut Removes See Also the currently The Multilayer File Format selected layer from the Layer List and places it onto the Clipboard Paste Inserts the Clipboard Layer into the Layer List at the currently selected position Paste Last Inserts the Clipboard Layer into the Layer List as the last layer Rename Renames the name of the selected layer A copy of the layer s data is performed Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 102 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences The Layer Parameters Layer Parameters N Reference fue Z Step TEE 2 Fotal e na GrowFac The Layer Tools Each layer has four parameters that are associated with it The layer parameters are associated with the currently selected layer N Reference Z Step Z Total GrowFac Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 103 Not Import
245. r s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Facies N o t Source Properties Editor in a Or Py eli 4 In the Source Properties Editor choose Mix And Match Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 268 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences if Figure Ho 3 Source Properties Editor File Edit Tools window Help Pattems C SuperGaus Ard 1 Hermite Pattern a Mix And Match E e Y Pattern Exponential Fee Pattern Parameters MES FWHMX Seg FWHMY Toe 8 Fads feo radis Vet Pargett tims S Largeur A Heme lA Hermite ir Angle j Laser Diode Calculator Help Cancel Prey Newt For most commercially available laser diodes the electrical field in the x direction is Gaussian shaped and its an exponential shape in the y direction Hence once the data of Full Width Half Maximum FWHM of the spot in x and y direction are entered this program will automatically generate a custom pattern In most laser diode specifications only Full Width Half Maximum FWHM unit degree of the laser in far field for x and y directions are provided Hence the Laser Diode Calculator in this menu is provided to calculate FWHM in spot size 5 Click Laser Diode Calculator Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 269 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences if
246. r s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences For either parameter a wavelength dependent index of refraction can be specified with a dispersion file if the Use Dispersion File box is checked The file is specified by selecting the Change File button Dispersion files can be constructed with the Dispersion Calculator or dispersion files can be constructed by the user with the correct Dispersion File Format TFT General Parameters HARAMETER DESCRIPTION Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 111 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences performed From lens pupil to There are several choices for the Type of Calculation to be Takes the field diffracted from a lens exit pupil and calculates the angular spectrum of the electric field distribution at a plane inside the thin film stack The plane is located at layer of interest and the depth dimension offset from the top of the layer is specified by zoffset This option must be used with an Optics Object the Optics Object must be set to a Vector electromagnetic calculation in the Propagation Panel Also the Propagation to Target 3 must be set to Stop at exit pupil If layer of interest is set to 0 the result is the reflect fields at the top surface of the stack inside the incident medium From lens pupil to inside film Takes the field diffracted from a lens exit pupil and calculates the electric fie
247. r the TARGET MASK menu BULK REFLECTION is selected and under the MENU ITEMS menu REPLACE A PIECE 1s selected Click GO 2 Now the ADD A PIECE wizard is opened The first step is to choose a pattern A uniform pattern is a simple piece so select it from CHOOSE FROM CATALOG PATTERNS and click NEXT gt Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 332 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Figure No 4 reference mirror for arm one M1 Properties Editor Se File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help Choose a pattern Input f riput from file Create custom pattern One Dimensional Grating Pyramid Function Linear Ramp Help Cancel His Mest z Choose UNIFORM from the list of patterns and click NEXT gt Make sure that the FULL WINDOW is used and move on This next step is the step that creates the uniform reflection for the mirror We want a perfect mirror for the simulation so a value of 1 0 is what is needed Put a 1 0 in both MIN and MAX Make sure both SCALE DATA and AMPLITUDE are selected as shown below Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 333 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences lt Figure No 4 reference mirror for arm one M1 Properties Editor L fol File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help Scaling Scale Data Amplitude C Phase Phase Option only works when multipling C DoNot Re scale Data
248. raphically It also allows the user to change the parameters which are associated with the lens The Plot Area The Plot Area shows what the lens system looks like 0 06 0 04 002 axis E 0 02 0 04 0 06 f 2 ne cae A asis gt The Zoom Control can be used to magnify and pan the plot The stop entrance pupil and exit pupil are displayed on the plot A small number of geometrical rays indicate the light path through the system Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 81 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences The Lens View Menu The Lens Viewer has several menu items that allows you to change the properties of your lens and the properties of the lens viewers Properties This lets you modify the properties of the lens object Setup Use to change the lens prescription file more Propagation Propagation calculation options more Aberration Add lens aberrations more Illuminator Specify an illuminating lens more Sampling Specify sampling more Lens This lets you edit your lens Editor Lens Settings Change Stop Surface Stop Diameter more LAMBDA Lens Editor Modify the parameters that are associated more with each surface of the current lens the one which is being viewed Viewer This allows you to modify the Lens Viewer s settings Settings Viewer Change the settings of the Lens more Settings Viewer Copyrigh
249. rations allow the user to modify parameters of other objects during a simulation They are two basic delta objects the Gooey Delta and the Script Delta The Gooey Delta object allows to quickly specify how and when the parameters should be modified during a simulation The Script Delta is a more advanced modification using script files Gooey Delta Panel Custom Gooey Variable Configuration Panel Delta Function M files Script Tool Properties Choice Delta Variables Scalar Delta Variables String Delta Variables Layer Specific Gooey Delta Variables Surface Specific Gooey Delta Variables Monte Carlo Analysis RSS Analysis Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 133 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Gooey Delta Panel Introduction Delta objects allow the user to modify parameters of other objects during a simulation The Gooey Delta object allows to quickly specify how and when the parameters should be modified during a simulation Note for most objects the parameters are only modified during the simulation and will revert to their original values after the simulation but for the Layer Specific MO and TFT Gooey Delta Variables and all the Lens Gooey Delta Variables the parameters will keep their last values from the simulation For running multiple consecutive simulations it is recommended to not use the objects initial value for the parameter This also means that if you have severa
250. release Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 37 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences The Projection Illuminator Lens Portion The Projection Lens is the lens that images the illuminated mask target onto the final target Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 38 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences About Panel Description Each object uses About Panel to allow the user to view important information about that object quickly This information includes the name and the description of an object and when the Optiscan Simulation Engine is allowed to call that object s calculation procedure The About Panel can be viewed with the Right Mouse Button and by displaying an object s properties Displaying the About Panel with the Right Mouse Button You can access the About Panel by clicking the Right Mouse Button over an object est iF Delete ror This will display a non editable version of the About Panel Figure No 4 About Source AOU Name Source Desci lt none gt Calculates on Every Chain Calculation Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 39 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences The Editable Version of the About Panel The editable version of the About Panel is displayed by editing an object s properties Use the Edit Object feature and
251. responsivity pattern 1s updated See Also 2d viewer ink Parameters Panel Command Line Functions Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 52 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Multiple Detector Example An extremely useful property of the simulated detector object is that it does not modify the field that is incident upon it That is if another Optiscan object follows the DETECTOR object in the Optiscan chain the field incident on the next object WILL NOT HAVE BE MODIFIED by the detector object In this sense the detector object acts like the LOOK object in that it does not affect the optical field This is useful because it allows the user to simulate a detector with more than one output For example consider the following quadrant detector A REY In this situation a different current is detected from each of the 4 detector elements that are illuminated This sort of detector can be simulated in Optiscan by creating 4 separate detectors with the following responsivity patterns Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 53 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences AT EET LES E BOG Bale Gelb Ep om U riaki Use hd bina Ler 4 bre ii essa se re Kina sai i i Len hw parsi Fi ail al ie F nde Ar ee ee a yy I a sine DHE DH Tent Each of these detectors is set to generate a separate ou
252. rget_x_file Name of the file that has the x polarized target information target_y_file Name of the file that has the y polarized target information target_z_file Name of the file that has the z polarized target information Notes Make sure that any links going out of the reflective target are Reflected Fields links See Link Parameters Panel See Also 2d viewer Link Parameters Panel Transmission Target Command Line Functions Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 107 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Transmission Target Description The equation below shows the system matrix that describes the interaction with the incident field matrices and the target The result is saved in the output fields Ext Ey Ezt The resultant fields are accessable through simdata Each of the elements of the target matrix is a matrix itself that is specified by the user through the 2d viewer A target is described by 3 files one for each polarization direction Complex index of refraction matrices for x y and z polarization are saved in the target file with the name tar_br Depth matrices that desribe the physical thickness of the material are saved with the name tar_db Faraday rotation matrices that describe any coupling between the fields have the name tar_yy ep Jo My ed ep J Nn edel 0 A A 27 27 E ep Nyy dy epi jy ody 0 F B mit By in 0 0 exp J Nedz A refractive i
253. rier series that mathematically describes the grating structure Base Period Sets the length of one period of the grating structure This quantity is entered in meters Number of Periods Determines the number of periods of the grating to be used in calculations Index of Incident Medium Specifies the index of the incident medium i e the layer that is on top of the grating This quantity may be held constant or may be specified by a dispersion file Index of Substrate Specifies the index of the substrate i e the layer that is below the grating This quantity may be held constant or may be specified by a dispersion file Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 278 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences RCWT Layers The RCWT layers panel is where the parameters for each layer of the grating are set aE File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help ROWT settings ROWT Layers Layerlist Filename Laver Parameters Laver List 1 2 Height meters Re O009 M Vary Layer Height InGteEMment meters oc Duty Cycle 0 3 OF Index 1 E M Use Dispersion File RCT Layer Men a Copy Cut Faste Paste Last E TI ange tihe Import List Clipboard Index 2 allurninum dat jf Use Dispersion File Change File Preview Help Cancel LIE The variables shown above are defined as follows Height This specifies the height of the s
254. right 2005 University of Arizona 413 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help Views ColorMaps Aerial irradiance imz edo Min 2 86408e 044 Max 4 91534e 006 Max gok Data File plot 3 5 1 25 mat Look Data eT fanemilted Min hd Value 4457e 006 X 1 037 Y 2321 Help Pinse Or if grayscale is preferred Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 414 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Figure Mo 5 Fie Edit View Insert Tools Window Help Views ColorMaps Aerial irradiance imz edo Min 2 86408e 044 Max 4 91534e 006 Max Look Data File eee Look Data eT aeemited E Main hd VYalue 1 486e 006 0 3233 Y Fead Help Close The irradiance profile for the incoherent source is quite different from that of the coherent source as shown below Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 415 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Figure No 4 Profile Plot l i ioj Fie Edit wiew Insert Tools Window Help DeRESkAALY AP x10 Aerial Irradiance Mma Profile Plot Profile Profile Aerial lrradiance vwirn2 Value
255. rizona College of Optical Sciences coordinates propagates the laser beam through the lens system and provides the transmitted field distribution in the image plane with the proper image plane coordinates A beam splitter object will modify both the reflected and transmitted fields A partial list of available OptiScan objects includes Optics lens system Reflective target Transmission target Multiple layer fluorescent target Thin film target Magneto optic target Simple responsivity detector Fiber detector Source Propagate Beam splitter Polarization element Tools O Look utility object Gooey delta utility object Script delta utility object Save fields utility object Restore fields utility object Mathematical operation O OOOO Usually calculations require more than one object For example a laser source is often combined with a lens to make a field distribution at the target plane which can then be saved to a file Therefore objects must be linked together to form a calculation chain With the graphical user interface of OptiScan building the chain takes the form of making links arrows between objects Before a calculation the user specifies the order of the links in the chain that will be used An example chain is shown below for the source lens save calculation Notice that the links are shown as yellow arrows The first link between the source and the lens is assigned T 1 which ind
256. rkspace This document describes the various features of the Main Project Workspace Figure No 2 OPTISCAN 1 00 simpledisk mat System Build Help Arrange Object Make link i Edit Object i Edit fink Delete Object Delete link Add link to chain Clear chain i ee ee ee ee n Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 17 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences The name of the OPTISCAN system in this case simpledisk mat is placed in the window s titlebar System Menu Polarization Element Allows the user to save the current system to disk Many of the OPTISCAN model s data are stored in separate files These are saved immediately For example if the source s Save Ba n aa electric fields are modified using the Add A Piece wizard Ae eee He then they are immediately saved The source s dimensions SOVE are not saved until the system is saved 5 a Se Sae Ae Allows the user to save the current system to a new a project TE TENPE E The entire project is copied to the new project folder Close Allows the user to set global sampling parameters and other Preferences values Close Closes the current system The user is asked if the current system should be saved before the Project Window is closed Build Menu The Build Menu allows the user to create physical optics objects If the Source item was chosen from the Build menu then
257. rmation pupil Aperture Information STONS 2 slOD 6 16497 ENPO 8 16497 EXPD 16 aga ENPZ trobjH20 or ENP THIffr first elemet ExPZitrimgj 40 005 of EXP THlitr last elerentj 40 FMOfat usedi 2 5 MAfimg at usedj u 2 FNOOUnt 1 635299 Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 248 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Auxillary Command Line Functions Slide 5 a fir First order lens information fir First order optics EFL 1 3 3533 BFL bbk Fe L 6 bbb r MAG 1 MD 20 QAL 10 TT 50 005 Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 249 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Auxillary Command Line Functions Slide 6 a sur Surface information Sur No Radus Thickness Inde x Sur 1 Inf Subse Ae U Shs 20 FI Sure 28 Sstteo nt U 4 Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 250 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Auxillary Command Line Functions Slide 7 a field Object and image field information field Field Information YOBR 0 YANO YIM 0 Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 251 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Auxillary Command Line Functions Slide 8 a seidel Displays the Seidel aberrations
258. rms array of Layer List Parameters Each of the specified layers must contain a data matrix called Nmat The layer list should be stored ina MATLAB 5 0 or compatible MAT file MATLAB 4 2c is not familiar with the struct data type Layer List Parameters Structure Each Layer List Parameter Structure uses the following declaration layer_parms i1 struct n_reference double zstep double ztotal double growlac double Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 105 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Reflective Target Description The equation below shows the system matrix that describes the interaction with the incident field matrices and the target The result is saved in the output fields E Ey Ezr The resultant fields are accessible through simdata Each of the elements of the target matrix is a matrix itself that is specified by the user through the 2d viewer A target is described by 3 files one for each polarization direction Complex bulk reflection matrices for x y and z polarization are saved in the target file with the name tar_br Depth matrices that describe the physical thickness of the material are saved with the name tar_db Kerr rotation matrices that describe any coupling between the fields have the name tar_yy an exp l F p 2a 0 0 B 5 Eo fe OFS sN A 0 exp J 2a 0 He Fe Ule mA 0 0 mgA 0 0 exp f
259. ro value In addition to OptiScan objects several useful calculators are available that do not require a chain calculation A partial list of these calculators which are accessible through the Accessories menu item in the project widow includes Optical fiber beam calculator Gaussian beam width calculator Laser diode beam calculator Thin film calculator RCWT calculator rigorous coupled wave theory Glass dispersion calculator Calculations in OptiScan are organized into projects That is each new type of calculation should be given its own project and saved separately For example the calculation shown in the previous figures might be assigned the name nonlinear_defocus and saved under that name by selecting save project as under the System menu item in the project widow The name of the new project can also be specified when a new project is opened It is a good idea to save project periodically during the construction of a new project in order to avoid potential problems with computer crashes Existing projects can be opened by selecting Open Existing OptiScan Project Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 11 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences on the entry widow at any time after startup OK you are probably anxious to get started Hopefully you have at least read these OptiScan Basics pages You really should go through the rest o
260. s 0 the field is not saved ezt_flag Selects whether or not to save the z polarized transmitted fields If the value is 1 the field is saved if the value is 0 the field is not saved exr_flag Selects whether or not to save the x polarized reflected fields If the value is 1 the field is saved if the value is 0 the field is not saved eyr_flag Selects whether or not to save the y polarized reflected fields If the value is 1 the field is saved if the value is 0 the field is not saved ezr_flag Selects whether or not to save the z polarized reflected fields If the value is 1 the field is saved if the value is 0 the field is not saved sav_base_index A number used in order to catalog the files generated by many sequential simulations For example if the filename flds v dat is used with a sav_baseindex 1000 then the Ist imulation will have a filename flds1001 dat associated with it the 2nd simulation will have a filename flds1002 dat associated with it etc sav_directory The directory name where the field files are stored By default the program looks in the userdata folder of the current project sav_filename The name of the file containing the field data to be saved The default filename is flds mat Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 310 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences See Also Link Parameters Panel Command Line Functions Copyr
261. s between 1 and 1 Points must go in a counter clockwise fashion O Output yy 2 D matrix containing pyramid information example yy pym 001 001 1e 5 le 5 25 0 25 5 75 5 25 75 Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 240 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Auxillary Command Line Functions Slide l Slide2 Slide3 Slide4 Slide5 Slide6 Slide7 Slides Slide9 Slide 10 Slide 11 Slide12 Slide13 Slide1l4 Slide15 Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 241 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Auxillary Command Line Functions Slide 1 gt LENS NOTES Help notes for using the Optics Module Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 242 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Auxillary Command Line Functions Slide 2 Auxillary Functions General Description The user can type a simple statement in the MATLAB command line to examine proerties of an OPTICS module in more detail To use these functions simply open an OPTICS module edit window and type the command at the MATLAB prompt Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 243 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Auxillary Command Line Functions Slide 3 a Auxillary Functions Usage a Piper Ar v A Mremi Fair
262. s increased Only zoom the X axis Only zoom the Y axis When the plot is clicked on the magnification factor 1s decreased The default magnification 1s restored OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences The Zoom Control Purpose The Zoom Control allows the user to zoom in and out of plots The Zoom Control This 1s what the zoom control looks like Al jmi The Zoom Control Menu M D Y By clicking on the M the Zoom Control Menu is shown Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 232 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences The Zoom Control Menu Zoom On When the plot is clicked on the plot is zoomed Zoom X When the plot is clicked on only the X axis is zoomed Zoom Y When the plot is clicked on only the Y axis is zoomed Zoom Off Turns zoom off Reset Resets the plot s x and y axis s back to their original values The Zoom Control Panning Buttons By clicking on the arrows of the Zoom Control the plot is panned left right up and down Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 233 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Chapter 6 Command Line Working with the Command Line Optiscan is fully capable of being run directly from the MatLab command line without using the graphic user interface There are also numerous command line prompts th
263. s which file contains the specified incoherent field matrices for Restoring or which file will contain the specified field matrices for Saving The Save and Restore Fields objects support automatic incoherent filename enumeration For example the filename source_point i mat will be replaced with source_point 0 mat source_point 1I mat source_point 3 mat The i ts replaced with i PointNumber IncoherentBaseIndex In this formula PointIndex 1 N 1 N is the number of source points Hence if N 50 then the Save Fields object will save 50 source point files and the Restore Fields object will load 50 source point files The i may lie anywhere within the filename specification See Incoherent Base Index Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 308 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Base Index Coherent Field Files Specifies the base index for the filename enumeration If Base Index 1000 then flds v mat will be replaced with flds1001 mat flds1002 mat flds1003 mat Hence the value of v ts the visit count plus the base index This makes working with parallel data sets easy Incoherent Field Files The Save Fields object uses the Incoherent Base Index that was specified for either the Source object or the Restore Fields object See File Command Line Variables Restore Fields O ext_flag Selects whether or not to restore
264. sampling by decreasing the distance between the samples X Sampling and Y Sampling in the properties of the object However decreasing these values too much can cause your computer to slow down considerably and even freeze when you try to add multiply or replace a piece Center Shift Distance in meters that the center of the slit should be shifted relative to the period Angle Angle of rotation in degrees of the entire grating Choosing zero degrees results in a vertical grating Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 209 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Coefficients al alO are the coefficients for the cosine part of the Fourier transform b1 b10 are the coefficients for the sine part of the transform Finishing the Wizard The Piece Size window is where the size and location of the grating is specified The grating will be re interpolated based on the sampling of the mask it is being placed into If the Full Window Button is clicked then the grating will replace the old mask entirely on 10 Magnitude Min U Max U window Size width 066005 length D25005 window Center Cenite 05 005 Center Scaling The Grating Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 210 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences The scaling parameters specify the dynamic range of the grating One purpose of
265. search Group Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 363 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Scanning Spot Tutorial Slide 2 a ICAL DATA STORAGE CENTER Optiscan project See eee pd wales Te i Add link to chain i Ecit Object ig Edit link Elear chain Delete Object Delete link FSF Net ee gt Look object KEARREEREES Objective s 1 Objective focusing Q collection lens wf wR Collimated _laser____ source Gooey delta ee ee ee ee eS Fort trtrrtrtrr ee a in Pt a a oe he a ee te eS ae Milster Research Group Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 364 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Scanning Spot Tutorial Slide 3 a PTICAL DATA STORAGE CENTER A FJ E Modelling a Scanning spot system tor Optical Data Storage using Optiscan This is a tutorial outlining the steps to modelling a laser scanning system used for scanning optical disks The topics covered will be as follows deal laser source ideal focusing and collection optics Grating like object to scan Gooey delta object Detector to measure the current output from the scanning system Saving the scalar optical output flelds of the system Appendix on propagation and sampling Appendix on building up a scan object Milster Resear
266. ser s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Diffraction Efficiency Calculator The diffraction efficiency calculator allows the user to calculate the efficiency of the grating structure under plane wave illumination Both reflected and transmitted efficiencies may be calculated It is located on the main calculator panel To run the diffraction efficiency calculator click Calculate Diffraction Efficiency Diffraction Efficiency Varied Parameter He Orders No Orders theta degrees 3 3 Start Stop Increment 0 ad A FP Uge lithew Munna Technique Reflected Calculate Diffraction Efficiency Transmitted Calculate Difraction Eticieney The basic parameters of the calculator are defined as orders The number of positive diffracted orders the user wishes to display An entry of 3 in this field will tell the calculator to compute the 1 2 and 3 diffracted orders of the grating orders The number of negative diffracted orders the user wishes to display An entry of 3 in this field will tell the calculator to compute the 1 2 and 3 diffracted orders of the grating start The starting value for the chosen variable parameter stop The ending value for the chosen variable parameter increment The step value that is used to get from start to stop Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 283 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizon
267. sk x Source Menu Items Replace A Piece F Ga Al 1 ajm hd a Yalue 0 a 105 Y BF Help Close 14 On the SOURCE PROPERTIES EDITOR window select ADD PIECE under the MENU ITEMS drop down menu Click GO 15 Select CHOOSE FROM CATALOGUE PATTERNS and click Next 16 Select CIRCLE Click NEXT 17 A circle with a radius of 1 0 mm is desired for this example so the window size must be changed accordingly In the Window Size box enter 0 002 for both the WIDTH and the LENGTH note in order to refresh the picture at the left click anywhere in the SOURCE PROPERTIES EDITOR window after changing a value The SOURCE PROPERTIES EDITOR should now look similar to the following picture Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 456 18 19 20 21 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences A Figure No 3 Source Properties Editor File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help Window Size Width Length Window Center Center i Y Center T Find Wirt Full Wir 2 x10 Help Cance Prey Mext gt Click NEXT SCALE DATA AND AMPLITUDE should be selected the MAX should be 1 and the MIN should be 0 Click Next Save the file as src2x mat and click FINISH The SOURCE PROPERTIES EDITOR will now look similar to the following picture Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 457 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Opt
268. space Calculates the 1 e radius of the IEI Gaussian propagation mode in a single mode fiber TET Calculator Located in the accessories menu of the project workspace Calculates the transmission and reflectivity of a multi layer thin film structure Waveguide Analyzer Located in the accessories menu of the project workspace The OSC Wave program that functionally evaluates a waveguide It provides the eigenfunctions and eigenvalues of the scalar wave equation for the principle component of the electric field of all bound modes Time Stamp A time stamp is now included in detector output files Added Examples to Help Pages Custom Pattern Generator Optical Fiber Calculator Laser Diode Calculator Gaussian Beamwidth Calculator TFT Calculator PDF version of the user s guide now available 10 Because the diffraction calculation is done with sampling of the numerical aperture both in image space and object space this will cause the XY coordinates in diffraction simulation results to not match the first order expectation At low NA the mismatch is quite small however we have to correct the difference between SIN Numerical Aperture and TAN First Order Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 23 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences New features in OPTISCAN version 6 0 Compatibility with Matlab v6 0 and v6 1 Improvements to the GUI Delta
269. sponsivity such that only the upper right hand corner of the total detector area is sensitive to the light impinging on the detector Note that the data values given in the 2 D array represent the detector responsivity and have units of AMPS WATT Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 45 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Figure No 5 Detector Properties Editor File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help Views ColorMaps y we Magnitude hin U Max 0 5 z Max Detector File 11 det mat Detector Layer Hesponeivity Menu lene Properties VYalue A 00007138 Y 0 0005 Help Close The size and sampling of the detector can be reconfigured by the user by selecting the PROPERTIES menu item and clicking on GO This opens the DETECTOR DIMENSIONS window This window functions exactly like the DIMENSIONS windows for the SOURCE object and the many TARGET objects The size offset and sampling rates can be easily reconfigured by the user However always remember to check your sample size so that the total array size of the detector is reasonable It is necessary to be careful not to have a detector whose size is lcm x 1cm and whose sampling is le 7 x le 7 because this would result in an array size of 100000x 100000 which is far too large for the computer A good rule of thumb is to set your sampling such that the array size of your detector is between 100 x 100 and 1
270. st contain one mask Sample Output Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 179 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences 10 Magnitude Min D Max 1 250 200 This is the mark 150 inserted into the target s Bulk Reflection mask 100 ve Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 180 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences The Add A Piece Wizard Description The Add A Piece module allows pieces to be added to a mask This diagram shows a spot that was added to the land of a non reflective disk Getting Started Choosing a piece to add Getting Started Right click on the object you wish to add a mask to The object can be a target source detector or any object using the 2D viewer Click edit to bring up the properties editor Choose Add A Piece from Menu Items and click go Choosing a piece to add There are 4 ways to add a piece 1 Importing a bmp or mat file The Add A Piece wizard supports the importation of 256 color BITMAP s and Matlab MAT files BITMAPS can be created by a BITMAP drawing program such as Paint Brush MAT files can be generated in MATLAB using the save command 2 Creating a custom pattern The Custom Pattern Generator allows you to create gaus supergaus hermite and exponential patterns and even choose a different pattern for each axis 3 Choosing a catalog pattern Se
271. t pupil of the associated Optics Object such that z0 is set to focus at the location specified by layer of interest and zoffset offset within An offset from the top of layer of interest that is used to locate the calculation plane or the position of a point source The layer in which the calculation plane is located If layer of interest is set to 0 the reflected fields at the top of the layer stack are calculated An angular offset that can be used to specify a tilted film The angle is oriented with respect to the x axis This parameter is not used with the point source calculation See Also With the point source calculation option this parameter specifies the number of calculation points across the output angular spectrum Thin Film Layer Manager Link Parameters Panel Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 113 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences TFT Layer Manager Panel Description Allows the user to add delete and configure TFT layers Layer List po Layer List 12 gt Th ci pesu Copies the current TFT layer s Layer List Parameters to the san clipboard Removes the current TFT layer and places it on the clipboard Pastei Inserts a new TFT layer before the current layer jil Paste Last Inserts anew TFT layer after the current layer TFT Laver TFT Layer The listbox to the left shows the layer list The curre
272. t 2005 University of Arizona 82 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences The Axis Menu i Figure No 3 Lens Properties Editor File Edit Tools Window Help View Axis tight fill l m egual image square normal pi off U5 a S on tight sets the aspect ratio so that the data units are the same in every direction This differs from axis equal because the plot box aspect ratio automatically adjusts fill sets the axis limits to the range of the data ij places the coordinate system origin in the upper left corner The 1 axis is vertical with values increasing from top to bottom The j axis is horizontal with values increasing from left to right xy draws the graph in the default Cartesian axes format with the coordinate system origin in the lower left corner The x axis 1s horizontal with values increasing from left to right The y axis is vertical with values increasing from bottom to top equal sets the aspect ratio so that the data units are the same in every direction The aspect ratio of the x y and z axis 1s adjusted automatically according to the range of data units in the x y and z directions image is the same as axis equal except that the plot box fits tightly around the data square makes the current axes region square or cubed when three dimensional MATLAB adjusts the x axis y axis and z axis so that they have equa
273. the array size for Fast Fourier Transform calculations used in the simulation Finding the Model Sampling Panel In the project workspace click on the System menu then Preferences then click on the Sampling tab A Figure No 3 Setup Sampling Model Sampling FFT Array Size Help Cancel OK Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 222 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences The FFT calculation is used extensively when propagating optical fields It is implemented in the Optics object to propagate from the source plane to the entrance pupil and from the exit pupil to the target plane Although a wide range of values can be used for FFT Array Size calculations are generally faster if the value is a power of two Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 223 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Model Setup Panel Description Allows the user to modify model simulation parameters This panel is accessed by selecting the calc button in the project window or through the menu bar selection System gt Preferences Configurable Parameters Chain Count a _ the number of times that the OptiScan chain should m be evaluated number of calculation cycles the default value of LAMBDA to use The source LAMBDA 5e 007 and restore fields object can override this value via the source type panel The userdata fo
274. the file Circle3 BMP which comes with Optiscan Click Next after you have specified this file Click on the Full Win button The green border shows you the window where the piece will be inserted When you click on Full Win the piece you are adding circle3 bmp will consume the entire area of the target You can specify a custom piece width and length as wella custom piece x center and y center Click Next after you have specified this window 410 Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 355 In the proj folder of the Optiscan distribution there is a file called Circle3 BMP black donut on white background Winclows Size width 2000 Length 202 005 Window Center Center Yener Find win Full in OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Step 5 The Bitmap scaling factor is specified to convert the BMP which is in RGB red green blue space to the scaling you desire For this exercise set the scaling to 0 for the minimum and 1 for the maximum If a complex value is specified then there is a phase factor introduced Step 6 The last step to adding a piece is to save the updated mask Click on Finish to create the new mask Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 356 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Step 7
275. the x polarized transmitted fields If the value is 1 the field is restored if the value is 0 the field is not restored O eyt_flag Selects whether or not to restore the y polarized transmitted fields If the value is 1 the field is restored if the value is 0 the field is not restored O ezt_flag Selects whether or not to restore the z polarized transmitted fields If the value is 1 the field is restored if the value is 0 the field is not restored O exr_flag Selects whether or not to restore the x polarized reflected fields If the value is 1 the field is restored if the value is 0 the field is not restored O eyr_flag Selects whether or not to restore the y polarized reflected fields If the value is 1 the field is restored if the value is 0 the field is not restored O ezr_flag Selects whether or not to restore the z polarized reflected fields If the value is 1 the field is restored if the value is 0 the field is not restored O LAMBDA The wavelength of the restored field O use_lambda Selects whether or not to use the wavelength specified by LAMBDA A value of 1 sets the program to use LAMBDA and a value of 0 disables the use of LAMBDA O res_directory The directory name where the field files are stored By default the program looks in the userdata folder of the current project O res_filename The name of the file containing the field data to be restored The Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 309
276. them can be found here Scalar Delta Variables String Delta Variables Choice Delta Variables Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 137 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Delta Variable Debugging If you wish to see the value of the Delta Parameter during the simulation you can click on Debug Parameter check box E Debug Parameter oe If this box is not checked then the value of the Delta Parameter is not displayed in the MATLAB window If the box is checked then the value of the associated Delta Parameter is displayed in the MATLAB window This option is also useful to check your sequence of values before running a simulation with many chain counts Simply run the simulation with only the Deltas in the chain and the Debug option on Delta Variable Calculation Options The value of a Delta Parameter does not need to be updated during every simulation step The scheduling of a Delta Parameter calculation is done by using the Calculations Options Summary of Options Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 138 Every First Last Flagged See Also OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences The Delta Parameter is updated each time that the Gooey Delta is calculated The Delta Parameter is updated the first time that the Gooey Delta is calculated The Delta Parameter is updated on the last chain calculation Note lin
277. then click on the object you wish to edit Arrange Object Delete Object The About Panel can be viewed by displaying the About Tab Link Settings About Some object editors require the user to select Properties from the Go menu and then click the Go button to actually view the object s properties Specifying an Object s Name and Description The About Panel allows the user to enter a friendly name and a useful description about the object About Name Link 7 Dest peanas ae Name The Name field is used to give a user friendly name to an object The Optiscan Simulation Engine uses this name when it prints out its messages The Optiscan Modeling Environment uses it to label windows Desc The Desc field can be used to enter object important information such as a specific notation Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 40 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Specifying an Object s Name and Description The Calculate portion of the About Panel allows the user to specify when an object s calculation procedure is invoked Calculate Every Chain Calcuation First Chain Calculation Based On Flag Vector Reg vector a Last Chain Calcuation r Based On Input Link Every Chain Calculation Specifies that the associated object should have its calculation procedure called everytime that the Opitiscan Simulation Engine determines that t
278. tiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences and even freeze when you try to add multiply or replace a piece Center Shift Distance in meters that the center of the slit should be shifted relative to the period Angle Angle of rotation in degrees of the entire grating Choosing zero degrees results in a vertical grating Coefficients al alO are the coefficients for the cosine part of the Fourier transform b1 b10 are the coefficients for the sine part of the transform Finishing the Wizard The Piece Size window is where the size and location of the grating is specified The grating will be re interpolated based on the sampling of the mask it is being placed into If the Full Window Button is clicked then the grating will replace the old mask entirely io Magnitude Min 0 Max 0 WATRIOWe Size width O 66e 005 Length 02500 1 Window Center es Ceri 0 5e 005 Center a a Find Win Full win Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 206 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Scaling The Grating The scaling parameters specify the dynamic range of the grating One purpose of Bitmap Scaling is the addition of a phase factor to the grating Saving The Updated Mask Click browse to change directories See also One Dimensional Grating Rectangular Grating Fourier Series Gr
279. tical Sciences Multilayer Fluorescent Target Slide 10 a CFTICAL DATA STORAGE CENTER _ OP TISCAN Hep Flee tr ibcobere stimagig 5 Part IV Build the aggregate detector field doby yowself for each radial positon Onee you have done one radial posthon Assign the filename for that calepiaton And thengethre result of another radial positiors And save it differ rt natie Example iwe havata o scantung radial posttions me bhding 10 layers inthe zaxial direction at each radial position you have 20 results from part 3 1 to 10 resaltis for mero center madial positon 11 to 20 result gets after Sum scan radially Then first nm l to LO results and save its outcome as scan U result And second min 11 to 20 results The OF takes the individual fields from part 3 and builds the agzrezate incole rent nage The result i inunits of field magritide Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 484 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Multilayer Fluorescent Target Slide 11 lt COrTICAL DATA STORAGE CENTEA H __ OPTECAN Hep Fes trhcokeritimaghg S Fart Y Theincoherent fleldis reconstructed for viewing i You can see results by LOOK abject Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 485 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Chapter 12 Sample Projects Sample Projects GS Beam Shaper Copyri
280. tical Sciences Tutorial Coherent and Incoherent Point Source Imaging Description The purpose of this tutorial is to instruct the user on how to image two closely spaced point sources using the OPTICS object These point sources are uniformly illuminated and are imaged coherently and incoherently Step Place and Edit a Coherent Source O Convert a Coherent Source to an Incoherent Source Step 2 Place and Edit a Lens Incoherent Lens Settings Step 3 Observing the System Output Step 4 Linking the Elements Step 5 Creating a Chain Step 6 Running a Simulation and Viewing the Results O Results Using Coherent Light O Results Using Incoherent Light Variations See Also Step 1 Place and Edit a Coherent Source This section instructs the user on creating a source that consists of two pinholes Each point has a diameter of 5 microns and their center to center separation is 10 microns Each point is illuminated by plane waves 1 Select BUILD gt SOURCE from the menu at the top of the workspace 2 RIGHT click the SOURCE object x and select EDIT Select PROPERTIES from the drop down menu under MENU ITEMS Click on GO 4 The source size needs to be increased so change the LENGTH and WIDTH to 2 5e 004 in the DIMENSIONS section 5 Change the X OFFSET to AUTO CENTER 6 In the SAMPLING section enter 5e 007 in the SAMPLING dialogue boxes This will create A Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 396 Opti
281. to chain Edt Object Edtirk E Clear chain Delete Object E Cette ire Se jm mm mm mms mg mmm mm my mm mm E e e o a e Be sure to set the thickness of surface 4 to 5 um before the calculation Since the focus changes by 0 1 um after each cycle starting at Sum and ending at Sum requires 101 cycles Set Chain Count to 101 in the Setup panel after selecting the Calc button in the main window Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 490 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Troubleshooting and FAQs Problems opening a project DLL or Mex file problems Making OptiScan Writable Problems opening a project If you can t open any projects in OptiScan check to make sure that the history file is NOT read only Check this by going to your OptiScan directory and open the proj directory You should see a file named history mat right click on this file and click properties Make sure the box next to the Read only attribute is NOT checked Then click OK DLL or Mex file problems This is a version problem OptiScan 6 2 works with Matlab 6 5 It will not work with Matlab 7 0 Making OptiScan Writable OptiScan works best when all the files are writable 1 e do not have the property of being read only See Making OptiScan Writable for detailed instructions on how to make OptiScan writable Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 491 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manua
282. tor or any object using the 2D viewer Click edit to bring up the properties editor Choose Replace A Piece from Menu Items and click go When the Replace A Piece wizard comes up choose One Dimensional Grating and click next When the next panel comes up choose Fourier Series Catalog and click next You will then see the following panel Choose A Grating i Sawtooth C Triangle Choosing a Pattern Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 204 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Sawtooth Triangle Choose between Sawtooth or Triangle Grating and click next You will then see the direct input panel with the coefficients already filled in for you Fourier Series Grating direct input Base Period Center Shift Angle Coefficients de offset as F oaa ad E ad 0 04503 ad eon ao 0 01621 ab i af 100827 a g ad 00500 ati T Base Period 32 006 72 006 E bl m h2 i ba i bd i b5 H be lo bi EE be m bg m bio ic Important Note If the chosen period is too close to the sampling of the object results may be unpredictable If you experience problems with this increase your sampling by decreasing the distance between the samples X Sampling and Y Sampling in the properties of the object However decreasing these values too much can cause your computer to slow down considerably Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 205 Op
283. tput file and is linked into the system as ae Because the DETECTOR object does not modify the field these four simulated detectors Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 54 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences physically represent a quadrant detector Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 55 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Fiber Detector Description The fiber detector calculates the coupling efficiency of an incident field into a single mode optical fiber The coupling efficiency is defined as the fraction of the power of the incident optical field mode that is coupled into the propagating mode of an optical system 1 Optiscan calculates the coupling efficiency using the overlap integral described in the important equations section It should be noted that the coupling efficiency is always a number between 0 and 1 because it is the fraction of the incident power that is accepted by the fiber Getting Started Editing the Fiber Detector Using the Fiber Detector Important Equations Command Line Variables Notes References See Also Getting Started Select Build gt Detectors gt Fiber in the main model panel Click on Arrange Object and drag the fiber detector wT to the desired position Editing the Fiber Detector On opening the fiber detector icon for editing the propagating mode
284. ts O Input N 2 D array to be Fourier transformed O Output yy Fourier transform of N newifft This function calls the necessary quadrant swapping routines to perform a 1 D inverse Fourier transform Command yy newifft N Arguments O Input N Vector to be inverse Fourier transformed O Output yy Inverse Fourier transform of N newifft2 This function calls the necessary quadrant swapping routines to perform a 2 D inverse Fourier transform Command yy newifft2 N Arguments O Input N 2 D array to be inverse Fourier transformed O Output yy Inverse Fourier transform of N Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 239 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Other Functions phase This function is a renaming of the angle command The function takes in a number generally complex and returns the angle between the complex and real parts Command yy phase N Arguments O Input N Complex vector array or number O Output yy Angle between real and complex parts of N pym This function creates a 3 D pyramid Command yy pym dimensions sampling C P1 P2 P3 Arguments O Input dimensions Dimensions of pyramid in meters 2 element vector sampling Two element vector with the sampling C Center of pyramid P1 P2 P3 The three base points of the pyramid Coordinates should be given as an x y vector where x and y are Cartesian coordinate
285. ttings Panel Propagation Object O Angular Spectrum Propagation Chapter 2 Delta Operations Gooey Delta Panel Custom Gooey Variable Configuration Panel Delta Function M files Script Tool Properties Choice Delta Variables Scalar Delta Variables String Delta Variables Layer Specific Gooey Delta Variables Surface Specific Gooey Delta Variables Monte Carlo Analysis RSS Analysis Chapter 3 Modifying Objects The Add A Piece Wizard Input From File Panel Catalog Pattern Panel Custom Pattern Generator Custom Pattern Example Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 2 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Dimensions Tab Parameters One Dimensional Grating One Dimensional Grating Rectangular One Dimensional Grating Fourier Series Catalog One Dimensional Grating Fourier Series Direct Input One Dimensional Grating Fourier Series Trapezoid Bitmap Scaling Panel Dimensions Panel Chapter 4 Setting Simulation Parameters The Model Panel O Sampling O Setup Chapter 5 Viewing Objects Results Basic Viewer The Zoom Control Chapter 6 Working with the Command Line Command Line Functions Auxiliary Command Line Functions O pupil fir sur field seidel rayfan wavetan spot_diagram find chiefray intercepts oS a Ore Ot Oa OO O Chapter 7 Supplemental Calculators Gaussian Beam Width Calculator Laser Diode Beam Cal
286. tton to Kew Create the Project 7 You should see the Project Window Create the Objects You Need Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 348 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Step Objects are 1 created by using the Build menu They are always placed in the upper right hand corner of Saeed E plics i i dd link to chan rf Targets i t Salae chair pa Detectors S ounce Propagate Bear Splitter the Project Pools Window Step 2 Move your new object by Figure No 2 OPTISCAN Main Program Window V er dragging it to the desired Edit Window Help System Build location E Arrange Object E Edit Object Delete Object Step 3 Create some objects and position them like the picture to the right Sub Step Use Build Menu Item Icon Create A Delta Build Tools Gooey Delta yN Create a Look Build Tools Look Q Create a Target Build Targets Reflective Target Delta Object Will be used to simulate disk movement Look Object Displays Plots results Reflective Target Normal reflective Target Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 349 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Create Some Links Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Click on the Make Link radio button Make link in the Project Window Edit link Delete link Click on the Source a
287. tup OPTISOAN Predetined Scripts Active Script File Import Selected Import Custam E dit Notice that at this time there is no ACTIVE SCRIPT HILE 8 To load click IMPORT CUSTOM and find the correct m file that you saved in your scripts folder It will ask for a name to save it as It may or may not allow you to give it the same name if this is so go ahead and give the script a new name Just make sure the name matches the name in the function line 9 You will be able to edit it at anytime by just going back to this editor and clicking the EDIT button Step 9 Creating a Chain Before any simulations can be performed all links that will be used for the simulation must be added to the chain Only the links in the chain will be simulated 1 Select ADD LINK TO CHAIN budAiian SGI at the top of the workspace menu 2 Click on the arrow between the SOURCE and BEAMSPLITTER icons Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 342 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences The WHICH LINK selector box will show up Pick the one that was labeled to go first Continue adding all the links to the chain in this order First the SOURCE to the BEAMSPLITTER BEAMSPLITTER to REFERENCE MIRROR REFERENCE MIRROR to BEAMSPLITTER BEAMSPLITTER to OP SOURCE to BEAMSPLITTER BEAMSPLITTER to TEST MIRROR TEST MIRROR to BEAMSPLITTER BEAMSPLITTER to OP and finally OP to LOOK Remember
288. ty of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Custom Pattern Generator Description The custom pattern generator enables you to create various patterns directly instead of importing bmp or mat files Getting Started Choosing a pattern type Entering parameters Calculators Definitions of parameters Example See Also Getting Started Right click on the object in which a custom pattern is desired The object can be a target source detector or any object using the 2D viewer Click edit to bring up the properties editor Choose Replace A Piece from Menu Items and click go When the Replace A Piece wizard comes up choose Create Custom Pattern and click next You will then see the custom pattern panel Choosing a pattern type To choose a circular supergaus pattern or a hermite pattern simply click the option To choose different patterns for the x and y axis click Mix And Match and then choose a pattern for each axis from the drop down menus to the right Entering parameters When you click on a radio button to choose the type of pattern you want the relevant edit boxes are enabled in the Pattern Parameters Section For a round supergaus pattern only one FWHM and LargeNum is needed and only the x axis edit boxes are enabled Calculators Laser Diode Calculator Optical Fiber Calculator Gaussian Beam Width Calculator Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 190 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University
289. ty of Arizona 374 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Command Window Functions for the LENS Editor Slide 3 a EFL efective focal length BFL back focal length FFL front focal length MAG system transverse magnification IMD image distance OAL overall length of lens elements TT total track from object to image NOTE all distances are in lens units Usually millimeters Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 375 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Command Window Functions for the LENS Editor Slide 4 NOTE all distances are in lens units usually millimeters Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 376 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Command Window Functions for the LENS Editor Slide 5 YOB object height along y axis YAN chief ray angle in yz plane YIM image height along y axis NOTE all distances are in lens units usually millimeters Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 377 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Command Window Functions for the LENS Editor Slide 6 v This function displays the Seidel aberrations at St E l aa la a LA HI We ILH Th eet Tp Bill Ju LARG_INV
290. ue greater than The Chain Count variable is shown in an edit window after the Calc button in the lower right hand corner of the project window is selected The gooey delta object will then set the appropriate thickness before each of the chain calculations Notice that the gooey delta s link to the lens object is assigned O 1 which indicates an object field operation link that does not change the values of the field matrices In developing the OptiScan program with students it became clear that many simulation problems require additional processing of the optical fields beyond what 1s available with the standard objects Therefore the Mathematical Operation MOP object was created which allows the user to operate on the Ext Eyt Ezt Exr Eyr and Ezr field matrices and the sysxvec and sysyvec coordinate vectors For example assume that the nonlinear response of a material is desired as a function of lens defocus A MOP object can be added to the chain in order to perform the nonlinear calculation as shown below Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 10 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences The user calculation is written as a simple Matlab function The user accesses field matrices inside the function through the simdata structure For example if the user wants to access the Ext field the command MyExt simdata Ext can be used If the fourth order response is
291. ues with a mean of 6e 7 and a standard deviation of le 7 Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 156 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences String Delta Variables STRING DESCRIPTION The string description describes what the variable is used for STRING VALUE Sting poets fresim_ dim Base Substring esd ie Base Value o ay a ETR Step lype Step Value ModuloCount Fo Ee Base Sting i Use Objects Base stig A String Value is a series of strings such as resim_1 m resim_2 m resim_1 m resim_2 m The Base String for this series would be specified with resim_ d m and the Base Substring would be specified as Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 157 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences The d is replaced by the applying the following formula d Base Value Value where Value is calculated as Value n 1 Step Value where n is the number of simulation steps When the number of simulation steps equals Modulo Count then the series 1s reset VALUE VECTOR A Value Vector is a vector of values which specifies the exact value for Value String Options Base String resim_2 d m m Use Objects Base String Base Substring Base Value Value Vector 1234 Modulo Count Tint With this configuration the series resim_1 m
292. ure measured along the optical axis An even number of Fresnel zones projected upon an aperture produces a minimum at the center Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 452 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences of the diffraction pattern and an odd number of zones in the aperture produces a maximum at the center of the diffraction pattern The following is a diagram of Fresnel zones plane L 3M2 Waves L A observation point Y Fresnel zones Free Space Propagation 2 The propagate object in OptiScan uses the following equations to calculate the optical fields at a desired position in space when Angular spectrum propagation only Default is selected in the PROPAGATION METHOD panel Ctx yz f dZ o so j fia Biz eirca 3 zo jaf S fy Ea A al A oA where U x y z is the optical field at a particular point in space dS l a 0 f Ll x yO ext j an amp x 5 y fa represents the angular spectrum at z 5 cire a amp limits the region of integration to satisfy oo E l n Af j 4 is the wavelength of light being used represent the spatial frequencies in the x and y directions respectively Tai y p p q y p y Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 453 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences How the Program Works The complete setup for this experiment is shown in the figure below
293. uring every simulation step The scheduling of a Delta Parameter calculation is done by using the Calculations Options Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 164 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Summary of Options Every The Delta Parameter is updated each time that the Gooey Delta is calculated First The Delta Parameter is updated the first time that the Gooey Delta is calculated Last The Delta Parameter is updated on the last chain calculation Note links have Calculation Options associated with them Hence the Gooey Delta may not be calculated on the last chain calculation if the link s Calculation Options don t permit the Gooey Delta to be calculated on the last calculation Flagged A user supplied vector is used to specify when the Delta Parameter is updated If the Flag Vector is set to 1 2 inf then the Delta Parameter is updated every other time that the Gooey Delta is activated The Flagged calculation option is useful for things like scanning moving windows and toggling options Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 165 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Surface Specific Gooey Delta Variables Description Gooey Delta Variables that modify specific surfaces of a Lens Surface Specific Gooey Delta Variables work just like regular Gooey Delta variables except for and additional panel descr
294. veral pre made patterns are available to choose from such as data mark circle HF data pattern LF data pattern 4 Choosing a one dimensional grating Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 181 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Several one dimensional grating options are available to choose from Such as rectangular and three Fourier options direct input from a catalog and trapazoidal Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 182 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Input From a File Description Allows you to import your own bmp or mat files Specifying a Mask Specifying The Pieces Size Scaling The Mask Saving The Updated Mask Sample Output Specifying a Mask Step 1 Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 183 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences The Add A Piece wizard supports the importation of 256 color BITMAP s and Matlab MAT files BITMAPS can be created by a BITMAP drawing program such as Paint Brush Note 24 bit BTIMAP s do NOT work MAT files can be generated in MATLAB using the save command Figure B shows a sample input mask that is stored in a BITMAP file A B If a matrix is choosen the Add A Piece Wizard will ask which matrix it should use Specifying The Pieces Size Step 2 Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 184 OptiScan
295. versity of Arizona 66 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Beam Splitter Settings Transmitted Parameters Transmitted Component Transmitted Component X The fraction of the optical field amplitude in the X direction incident upon the beam splitter that is transmitted Transmitted Component Y The fraction of the optical field amplitude in the Y direction incident upon the beam splitter that is transmitted Reflected Parameters Flallected Component iieatran Tarr Reflected Component X The fraction of the optical field amplitude in the X direction incident upon the beam splitter that is reflected Reflected Component Y The fraction of the optical field amplitude in the Y direction incident upon the beam splitter that is reflected The values for the reflected and transmitted components may be real or imaginary Also the range of values that can be used is from negative infinity to infinity Note To get the power transmission reflection for the beam splitter in the X and Y directions square the transmitted reflected components in the X and Y directions Command Line Variables rx Reflected x component of the incident optical field ry Reflected y component of the incident optical field tx Transmitted x component of the incident optical field ty Transmitted y component of the incident optical field Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 67 OptiSca
296. will be re interpolated based on the sampling of the mask it is being placed into If the Full Window Button is clicked then the grating will replace the old mask entirely B 10 Magnitude Min O Max 0 Window Size Width 0666 005 Length 025 005 Window Center Meente 0 5e 005 Y ECerter Find Win Full in Scaling The Grating The scaling parameters specify the dynamic range of the grating Bitmap Scaling Bitmap Min Bitmap biag One purpose of Bitmap Scaling is the addition of a phase factor to the grating Saving The Updated Mask Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 202 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Click browse to change directories See also One Dimensional Grating Fourier Series Grating Direct Input Fourier Series Grating Catalog Fourier Series Grating Trapezoid Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 203 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences One Dimensional Grating Fourier Series Catalog Description Creates a one dimensional grating pattern using a Fourier transform with ready made coefficients Getting Started Choosing a Pattern Base Period Center Shift Angle Coefficients Finishing the Wizard See Also Getting Started Right click on the object in which a one dimensional grating is desired The object can be a target source detec
297. wing Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 420 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help Views ColorMaps Aerial lrradiance W m2 y 40 Min 1 95815e 033 Max 4 7757 32 006 2 Max gok Data File ioe Se trek Look Data eT fanemilted Mlin hd Value 4 451e 006 1 1 452e 008 Y 52986 009 Help Close Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 421 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences J Figure No 4 Profile Plot File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help JO H SB LAAL PPT 10 Aerial irradiance vim Profile Plot Aerial lrradiance vwirn2 Value 25 2 15 1 05 OF 05 1 15 2 25 Position MES units 5 When the aperture size is increased to 76 2 mm the following output is seen Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 422 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences ES File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help Views ColorMaps Aerial lrradiance imz qo Min 463741e 034 Max 2 12992 005 Max i nok Data File Look Data O46 05 Al PS Mlin Y 1 05 0 0 5 1 i 5 10 Value 8411e 006 x 9 764e 008 Y 3536 009 Help Close Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 423 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University o
298. y of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Thin Film Target Slide 1 gt TFT Tutorial Contents This tutorial provides several tutorials which discuss how to use the TFT model in OPTISCAN TFT Tutorial System using a solid immersion lens Reflected IFI Tutorial System e Phase Change ITF I Tutorial System Appendix A fancy plotting tips e Appendix B journal references e Appendix C conference paper references Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 429 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Thin Film Target Slide 2 a System Thin Film Target TFT Tutorial system Using a Solid Immersion Lens Simulate with OPTISCAN the Thin Film Target n ot i Eg ee er e a kart aae aa a ea a eee eee Interface ae ne sae We would like to calculate the lait Interface I electric field at two positions inside fst layer Air gap n the substrate 1st eRe Diet eae M observation Retractive index index of refraction plane a town e moat qg w tayer 1 1 000 100 nm observation A E plane layer 2 1 816 200 nm To Two observation planes are 0 and TOnm inside the substrate respectively Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 430 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Thin Film Target Slide 3 a Optiscan System Main Window for Thin Film Target
299. y of Arizona College of Optical Sciences ig 5 A represents the distance from the 2 vertex that P shifts Fl T g The other two variables are defined as follows n is the index of refraction of the lens tis the distance between the two surfaces Creating a Thick Lens This section instructs the user on navigating through the lens editor 1 From the BUILD menu select OPTICS The n icon should appear in the upper right hand corner of the workspace 2 RIGHT click the OPTICS icon and select EDIT 3 The following window should now be displayed Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 381 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences A Figure No 3 Lens Properties Editor File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help View Axis Ment ltem Properties F The default OPTICS object in OptiScan is a system of two thin lenses each with a focal length of 20 mm They are arranged such that the system s magnification is unity For this tutorial it is desired that the system consist of only one 100 mm focal length thick lens with a thickness of 15 mm and an index of 1 5 This lens is also set up to image a point with unity magnification 4 Select LENS EDITOR from the MENU ITEMS pull down menu Click GO Menu Items Properties T Properties Lens Editor Viewer Settings 5 The lens editor panel should look similar to the following figure
300. y the user However always remember to check your sample size so that the total array size of the detector is reasonable For example be careful not to have a detector whose size is lcm x 1cm and whose sampling is le 7 x le 7 because this would result in an array size of 100000x 100000 which is far too large for the computer A good rule of thumb 1s to set the sampling such that the array size of the detector is between 100 x 100 and 1000 x 1000 The propagating mode patterns of the FIBER DETECTOR may be reconfigured The procedure for editing a propagating mode pattern is identical to editing the shapes of the SOURCE or TARGET objects The user selects one of the editing options replace a piece multiply a piece or add a piece in the menu selection and follows the instructions to build the desired propagating mode pattern The user should note that the propagating mode pattern of the fiber is equal to Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 57 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Way x Y Z see Important Equations Menu lems Properties T Properties lt Replace 4 Piece Multipli Piece Add Piece Save Layer As Hew Layer Unlike the SIMPLE RESPONSIVITY DETECTOR the user may independently alter the mode patterns of the FIBER DETECTOR in the X Y and Z polarization directions Detector Files Ex fibl x mat Extiblamat o Z Ew Ably mat Ez fibl2 mat
301. yright 2005 University of Arizona 273 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences 7d Figure Ho a Source Properties Editor File Edit Tools Window Help Views ColorMaps q fagnitude Min 0 287175 Max 0 987476 Value 05056 2122e 007 Y 1 89e 006 Help Close See Also Laser Diode Calculator Custom Pattern Panel Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 274 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences Optical Fiber Calculator Description Outputs the radius of the effective gaussian see Loss Analysis of Single Mode Fiber Splices Getting Started Buttons Parameters See Also Getting Started The Optical Fiber Calculator can be accessed through the Accessories menu or from the Custom Pattern Panel Buttons New Fiber Button Clears the edit boxes Save Fiber Button Saves current values of the edit boxes Delete Fiber Button Deletes the current fiber as shown in the drop down menu Parameters Name name of the fiber Core Index index of refraction of the core Cladding Index index of refraction of the cladding Core Radius radius of the core Wavelength wavelength of the laser in meters See Also Custom Pattern Panel Copyright 2005 University of Arizona 275 OptiScan 6 2 0 User s Manual University of Arizona College of Optical Sciences RCWT Calculator Descri

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

詳細メニュー 取扱説明書  QuickStart Guide  Associations - pouvoirs publics : un mode d`emploi pour des  03-Subsistema GPS    Intel Core i5-4570T  seda con.conv.amoho. descripcion propiedades  Maytag W10550278A User's Manual  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file